Skip to main content

Full text of "Six essays on the Platonic theory of knowledge : as expounded in the later dialogues and reviewed by Aristotle"

See other formats


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2011  with  funding  from 

University  of  Toronto 


http://www.archive.org/details/sixessaysonplatOOwill 


SIX    ESSAYS 

ON 

THE    PLATONIC    THEORY    OF 
KNOWLEDGE 


CAMBRIDGE   UNIVERSITY   PRESS   WAREHOUSE, 

C.  F.  CLAY,  Manager. 

fLotrton:    FETTER  LANE,   E.C. 

(Blasgoto:    50,   WELLINGTON  STREET. 


ILetpjtfl:    F.   A.  BROCKHAUS. 

#efo  Hork:    G.  P.  PUTNAM'S  SONS. 

ftomfcag  an*  Calcutta:  MACMILLAN  AND  CO.,  Ltd. 


[All  Rights  reserved.] 


UG,r 

Zlf\  SIX    ESSAYS 

ON 

THE    PLATONIC    THEORY    OF 
KNOWLEDGE 

as  expounded  in  the  later  dialogues  and 
reviewed  by  Aristotle 


by 
MARIE   V.   WILLIAMS 

late  Marion  Kennedy  Student  of  Newnham  College 


Cambridge : 

at  the   University  Press 

1908 


Camtmtige : 

PRINTED    BY   JOHN    CLAY,    M.A. 
AT   THE    UNIVERSITY    PRESS. 


PREFACE 

rilHE  following  essays,  written  during  my  tenure  of  a 
-*-  studentship  at  Newnham  College,  Cambridge,  were 
the  outcome  of  a  genuine  interest  in  the  Platonic 
controversy,  and  of  a  desire  to  satisfy  myself,  by 
independent  study,  regarding  the  doctrines  that  the 
later  dialogues  seem  to  teach.  In  a  subject  that  has 
for  so  long  been  the  source  of  disagreements  one  can 
scarcely  hope  to  produce  a  work  that  will  commend 
itself  to  every  critic,  or  to  bridge  in  any  degree  the 
chasm  that  already  yawns  between  the  two  leading 
schools  of  interpretation ;  and  I  must  own  frankly,  at 
once,  that  I  belong  to  the  school  that  sees  in  the  later 
work  of  Plato  a  fuller  development  and  elaboration  of 
the  ideal  scheme  which  was  at  first  but  vaguely  sketched. 
It  is  not  the  spirit  of  controversy,  however,  but  the  hope 
for  a  better  understanding  of  this  position  on  the  part 
of  other  controversialists,  that  has  led  me  to  publish 
these  papers.  In  preparing  them  I  have  not  neglected 
to  make  myself  acquainted  with  the  position  taken  by 
other  schools;  but  that  I  am  chiefly  indebted  to  the 
Platonic  scholars  of  Cambridge  cannot  be  denied. 


\ 


VI  PREFACE 

A  word  perhaps  should  be  said  in  regard  to  the 
order  in  which  the  Platonic  dialogues  are  here  taken. 
I  have  assumed  throughout — and  I  believe  there  is  now 
almost  general  agreement  on  this  point — that  the  six 
dialogues  with  which  I  chiefly  deal,  viz.,  the  Parmenides, 
Theaetetus,  Sophist,  Politicus,  Philebus  and  Timaeus,  are 
posterior  to  the  Republic  and  the  Phaedo,  and  that, 
whatever  be  the  order  in  which  they  are  to  be  ranked, 
they  belong,  roughly  speaking,  to  the  same  period  of 
Plato's  thought.  The  special  order  in  which  they  are 
grouped  here  was  particularly  suited  to  the  form  of  my 
essays,  being  based  mainly  on  affinity  in  subject-matter; 
and  any  re-arrangement  of  the  first  four  would  not 
materially  affect  any  of  the  conclusions  I  have  reached. 
The  Philebus  and  the  Timaeus,  however,  I  cannot  help 
regarding  for  many  reasons  as  posterior  to  the  other 
four,  and  I  believe  that  this,  too,  will  be  conceded  by 
the  majority  of  scholars.  For  my  own  part,  I  would  go 
further  and  make  the  Timaeus  the  latest  of  them  all, 
though  I  do  not  think  that  this  particular  article  of  faith 
is  absolutely  essential  for  the  acceptance  of  the  results 
of  my  essays.  The  Philebus  and  the  Timaeus  have  so 
much  in  common  that  they  must  have  belonged  to 
practically  the  same  period  of  Plato's  life ;  and  the 
obscurity  of  the  former  might  plausibly  be  assigned 
either  to  the  initial  vagueness  of  a  fresh  development 
in  Plato's  philosophy,  or  to  the  contraction  due  to 
recapitulation. 


PREFACE  Vll 

I  have  derived  the  greatest  benefit  from  Professor 
Jackson's  articles  in  the  "Journal  of  Philology",  and  from 
Mr  Archer-Hind's  edition  of  the  Timaeus.  I  have  read, 
too,  with  great  interest  various  articles  by  Professor 
Shorey  in  the  " American  Journal  of  Philology",  and 
others  by  Mr  A.  E.  Taylor  in  "Mind".  I  have  profited 
also  from  Carlill's  lately-published  edition  of  the 
Theaetetus  and  Philebus. 

My  grateful  thanks  are  due  to  Mr  R.  D.  Archer- 
Hind  for  much  kind  help  and  criticism,  and  also  to 
Dr  Budge  of  the  British  Museum  for  various  suggestions 
regarding  the  subject-matter  of  Essay  V.  I  must  also 
acknowledge  my  obligations  to  Miss  Alice  Gardner,  of 
Newnham  College,  and  Miss  M.  E.  Thomson,  of  King's 
College,  Aberdeen,  for  their  help  at  the  proof-correcting 
stage.  Finally,  I  must  thank  the  officials  of  the 
University  Press  for  their  courteous  assistance  in  the 
details  of  publication. 

M.  V.  W. 

ISLEWORTH, 

January  Zlst,  1908. 


CONTENTS 

ESSAY  PAGE 

I.        The  Search  for  Knowledge     ...  1 

II.  The  Analogy  of  the  Arts  and   its  Ap- 

plication in  the  Politicus  and  Philebus  24 

III.  The  World-process  of  the  Timceus  .  44 

IV.  The  Ideas  as  9Api0[ioi      ....  67 

V.  The  Pythagorean  'ApiOp-ol  and  their  Re- 

lation to  the  Platonic  Ideas       .        .  88 

VI.  The  Aristotelian  Critique  of  the  Ideas 

and  Numbers  of  Plato        .         .         .         109 


ESSAY   I. 

THE   SEARCH   FOR   KNOWLEDGE. 

The  desire  for  knowledge,  so  Aristotle1  tells  us,  is 
implanted  by  nature  in  all  men,  but  the  intensity  of 
the  desire  varies  in  different  ages,  and  in  different 
types  of  men,  and  in  the  same  men  at  different  stages 
of  their  lives.  Plato,  we  know,  found  in  it  a  motive 
power  that  never  ceased,  throughout  a  long  life,  to  urge 
him  on  to  intellectual  labour  and  achievement,  but  even 
in  his  history  one  may  detect  times  of  crisis,  in  which 
the  fervour  of  a  glorious  hope,  or  a  dogged  pertinacity 
in  research,  shows  that  he  is  grappling  with  the  problem 
in  its  vastness. 

It  is  in  the  Phaedo  and  the  Republic,  first  of  all, 
that  he  makes  a  systematic  attempt  to  formulate  a 
scheme  of  knowledge.  In  the  former,  disappointed  by 
his  study  of  Anaxagoras,  he  determines  to  make  use  of 
the  indirect  method  of  \6yot,  if  thereby  he  may  attain 
to  metaphysical  verity.  In  the  latter  his  scheme  is 
complete,  his  plans  are  laid,  and  already  he  beholds  in 
anticipation  the  ISea  rdyaOov,  which  is  exalted  above 
both  knowledge  and  being,  and  is  the  goal  of  every 

1  Met.  A.  i.  1. 
w.  1 


2  THE   SEARCH   FOR   KNOWLEDGE 

human  effort.  The  last  chapters  of  Book  vi  reveal  the 
philosopher's  aspiration  visualised  and  glorified,  and  we 
cannot  doubt  that  he  has  actual  and  definite  hope  of 
attaining  to  the  truth  he  is  pursuing  along  the  lines 
which  he  there  indicates.  Yet  the  dialectical  method 
of  the  Republic  is  not  of  a  kind  to  satisfy  either  pupils 
or  master;  it  is  obscured  by  excess  of  light :  the  flights 
of  imagination  have  reached  a  height  to  which  sober 
intellect  cannot  climb.  It  is  imperative,  therefore,  that 
the  process  of  ascent  from  the  assumption  of  etSr]  to  the 
attainment  of  the  ap%?)  dwirodero^  should  be  described 
in  language  of  scientific  precision,  and  a  still  /uLa/cporepa 
7T€pio8os  must  be  undertaken  before  knowledge  is 
attainable.  It  is  with  some  of  the  sign-posts  that  mark 
off  this  more  circuitous  route  that  the  present  papers 
propose  to  deal. 

It  would  be  as  well  to  have  in  mind  at  the  outset 
the  leading  features  of  the  metaphysical  and  dialectical 
scheme  of  the  Republic,  and  of  its  complementary 
dialogue,  the  Phaedo,  which  belongs  to  the  same  stage 
of  Platonic  thought,  and  may  perhaps  have  been  written 
somewhat  earlier. 

In  the  first  place  we  are  definitely  informed1  that, 
quite  apart  from  the  world  of  sensible  things,  which, 
being  subject  to  the  Heracleitean  flux,  can  never  be 
objects  of  knowledge,  there  are  certain  perfect  and 
immutable  forms,  eiSij  avrd  /cad*  avrd.  The  exact  signi- 
ficance of  the  phrase  avrd  /cad'  avrd  is  not  easy  of 
determination,  but  in  the  light  of  Aristotle's2  evidence 
it  seems  plain  that  the  efty  are  transcendental  unities, 

1  Rep.  476  a  ;  596  a  ;  Phaedo  100  b  seq. 

2  Met.  A.  987b  7. 


THE   SEARCH    FOR   KNOWLEDGE  3 

exalted  in  some  vague  and  mysterious  way  above  the 
world  of  sensible  phenomena  by  reason  of  their  utter 
perfection  and  immobility.  The  ideas,  then,  are  avra 
Ka6"  avra  chiefly  in  virtue  of  the  sharp  contrast 
drawn  between  them  and  material  things,  for  that  they 
had  some  connexion  with  one  another,  and  with  the 
idea  of  Good,  is  an  inevitable  consequence  of  the 
dialectical  scheme  propounded  in  Book  VI. 

Further,  we  are  told  that  the  things  of  sense, 
through  fjL€0€%i<;  in  ecSrj,  become  possessed  of  certain 
characteristics,  and  are  called  by  certain  names  and 
described  in  certain  terms,  an  attempt  thereby  being 
made  to  explain  the  possibility  of  predication1.  Every 
predicate  corresponds  to  an  immutable  idea,  in  which 
the  particular  of  which  it  is  predicated  participates. 
Here  again  one  is  unable  to  render  a  satisfactory 
account  of  the  word  fjueOegis.  The  qualification,  077-77  Srj 
teal  07r&>?  7rpoa<yevofjLevr),  introduced  at  Phaedo  100  D, 
certainly  shows  that  the  method  was  but  hazily  con- 
ceived in  the  mind  of  Plato  himself,  and  that  the 
import  of  the  word  is  mainly  metaphorical,  like  that  of 
the  kindred  term  /jLLfjLTjcris,  which  occurs  more  frequently, 
though  not  exclusively,  in  the  later  dialogues2.  By 
the  very  vagueness  of  its  statement  the  doctrine  was 
assuredly  exposed  to  the  literal  interpretation  which 
is  ridiculed  in  the  Parmenides,  but  that  this  inter- 
pretation was  Plato's  deliberate  meaning  in  the  Phaedo 
and  the  Republic  we  have  no  justification  for  saying. 

Such  then  is  the  nature  of  the  elhrj  which  form  the 
ground- work  of  the  dialectical  process  of  Republic  VI, 


1  See  Ar.  Met.  A.  987b  9,  10. 

2  Cf.  Rep.  x.  597  seq. 


1—2 


4  THE   SEARCH   FOR   KNOWLEDGE 

a  process  which,  in  contradistinction  to  the  inferior 
system  of  Sidvota,  leads  directly  from  the  assumption 
of  hypotheses  to  a  first  cause  of  all,  and  is  in  no  way 
dependent  upon  the  things  of  sense.  Whereas  Stdvoia 
proceeds  from  the  assumption  of  hypotheses  to  a  con- 
clusion, dialectic  proceeds  upwards  from  hypothesis  to 
hypothesis,  until  the  idea  of  Good,  upon  which  all 
other  ideas  depend,  is  in  sight.  Once  the  IBea  rdyadov 
is  reached,  the  hypotheses  through  which  it  is  attained 
become  realities ;  they  are  no  longer  ideas  hypothetically 
asserted  but  actively  realised.  The  ideas  which  are 
thus  hypothetically  assumed  are  illustrated  chiefly  by 
the  universals  of  mathematics,  and  one  may  conclude 
that  it  was  chiefly  through  ideas  of  this  nature  that 
Plato  thought  of  rising  to  a  knowledge  of  the  Good; 
but,  on  the  analogy  of  the  converse  process  of  \6<yoc 
mentioned  at  Phaedo  101  D,  and  from  the  fact  that  £wa, 
<f>vT€VTa,  etc.,  are  at  510  B,  511  A  said  to  serve  as 
el/coves  in  the  lower  vorfcris,  one  would  conclude  that 
other  universal  hypotheses  too,  such  as  the  assumption 
of  an  avro  to  %wov,  are  conceived  of  as  contributing 
some  share  to  the  realisation  of  the  Good.  As  to  the 
function  of  Xojol,  it  would  appear  that  a  X070?  or 
definition  is  the  mental  or  verbal  counterpart  of  the 
elSos  whose  existence  is  asserted,  and  that  the  \6yot 
play  an  important  part  in  the  dialectical  process.  The 
first  step  is  to  postulate  an  elSo?,  the  next  to  define  it, 
then,  in  virtue  of  the  knowledge  thus  gained,  an  elSo? 
of  a  yet  higher  order  is  postulated  until  the  ISea 
rdyaOov  is  reached.  When  the  ISea  rdya6ov  has  been 
defined  and  grasped,  we  have  not  only  true  knowledge 
but  true  being,  for  in  the  idea  of  Good  knowledge  and 


THE   SEARCH   FOR   KNOWLEDGE  O 

being  coincide,  and  the  mere  fact  of  attaining  to  it  has 
proved  that  our  \6yoi  were  correct  representatives  of 
the  ideal  reality.  Thence,  as  Plato  says,  the  dialectician 
may  descend  with  confidence  in  the  line  of  the  ecS?], 
verifying  all  the  assumptions  that  he  originally  made ; 
the  vTToQeaeis  have  now  become  apxai  m  virtue  of  their 
connexion  with  the  apxh  avvTroOero^. 

The  system  of  knowledge,  then,  as  delineated  in  the 
Republic,  is  at  best  a  sketch.  It  is  shadowy  and  inde- 
finite, and  proclaims  itself  a  product  of  immature 
thought.  It  shows  no  comprehension  of  the  essential 
differences  in  general  predicates,  no  consciousness  that 
some  have  a  relative,  others  a  substantive,  significance. 
In  short,  the  scheme  must  not  only  be  re-stated,  but 
re-thought,  before  any  satisfactory  advance  can  be  made ; 
and  before  it  can  be  re-stated,  or  even  re-thought,  the 
whole  subject  of  predication  and  thought  must  be 
thoroughly  analysed,  investigated,  and  systematised. 
To  this  preliminary  task  Plato  addresses  himself  es- 
pecially in  the  Parmenides,  Theaetetus,  Sophist  and 
Politicus;  the  greater  task  of  re-thinking  and  re- 
stating his  earlier  scheme  belongs  chiefly,  though  not 
exclusively,  to  the  Philebus  and  Timaeus.  I  now  pro- 
pose to  deal  with  some  of  the  most  striking  contributions 
of  the  Parmenides,  Theaetetus  and  Sophist  to  the 
logical  problem,  reserving  for  further  treatment  the 
constructive  results  of  the  Politicus,  Philebus  and 
Timaeus. 

The  first  half  of  the  Parmenides  consists  mainly  of 
an  account  of  the  ideal  theory  of  the  Phaedo  and  Re- 
public,  followed  by  a  systematic  criticism  of  the  theory 
as  it  was  stated  in  those  dialogues.     First  of  all  we 


6  THE   SEARCH   FOR   KNOWLEDGE 

remark  that  the  young  Socrates,  who  is  introduced  as 
the  exponent  of  the  theory,  and  of  its  importance  in  the 
problem  of  predication,  displays  considerable  aversion 
to  assuming  ideas  to  correspond  to  every  predicate ; 
also  that  there  seems  to  be  a  tendency  to  draw  dis- 
tinctions within  the  ideal  world,  and  to  class  certain 
ideas  together,  instead  of  collecting  them  under  the 
heterogeneous  category  that  Republic  596  A  implies. 
Here  ideas  of  qualities,  of  ethical  notions,  of  natural 
species,  of  meaner  objects,  are  enumerated  separately, 
as  if  it  were  unconsciously  felt  that  they  are  essentially 
distinct  from  one  another.  Socrates,  though  assenting 
cheerfully  to  the  assumption  of  ideas  of  qualities  and 
of  ethical  notions,  seems  less  convinced  of  the  existence 
of  ideas  of  natural  kinds,  and  his  whole  soul  revolts 
from  the  thought  of  ideas  of  such  things  as  hair,  mud, 
dirt :  Parmenides,  however,  rebukes  him,  on  the  ground 
that  such  a  feeling  is  unworthy  of  the  true  philosopher. 
"  You  are  young,  Socrates,"  he  says,  <:  and  when  philo- 
sophy has  got  a  firmer  hold  of  you,  you  will  not  despise 
even  the  meanest  things  " — a  remark  which  should  be 
borne  in  mind  as  indicating  in  general  the  line  of 
development  which  the  young  Socrates,  and  Plato, 
whom  he  represents,  may  be  expected  to  take. 

The  destructive  criticism  that  follows  is  well  known 
to  every  reader  of  Plato.  If  the  particular  participates 
in  the  idea,  it  must  participate  either  in  the  whole  or  a 
part ;  if  in  the  whole,  the  idea  is  not  one  but  many ;  if 
in  the  part,  the  idea  becomes  divided,  and  is  many. 
Hence  the  idea  is  either  not  a  unity,  or  else  particulars 
cannot  participate  in  it.  Furthermore,  if  every  plurality 
of  particulars  called  by  the  same  name  has  an  idea 


THE   SEARCH   FOR   KNOWLEDGE  7 

corresponding  to  it,  the  idea  will  be  indefinitely 
multiplied,  for  the  idea  when  added  to  the  first  group 
constitutes  another  group,  for  which  another  idea  must 
be  postulated,  and  so  on  ad  infinitum.  These  two  argu- 
ments, it  must  be  noted,  are  aimed,  not  so  much  at  the 
existence  of  ideas,  as  against  the  statements  regarding 
their  nature  which  were  made  in  the  Phaedo  and  Re- 
public. It  is  not  the  existence  of  ideas,  but  their 
supposed  actual  immanence  in  particulars,  and  their 
intimate  connexion  with  predication,  that  is  chiefly 
attacked — a  conclusion  which  is  confirmed  by  the 
further  steps  of  the  controversy. 

Socrates,  to  extricate  himself  from  these  difficulties, 
suggests  that  the  fatal  consequences  might  not  follow 
if  the  idea  were  conceived  of  as  a  voij/jlcl  existing  only 
in  ^ifvyai.  Parmenides,  however,  points  out  that  every 
vorijxa  must  be  supposed  to  have  an  object,  and  that 
this  would  only  give  us  the  old  idea  back  again, 
remarking  further  that  such  a  conception  of  the  idea  in 
no  way  justifies  an  inherent  connexion  between  ideas 
and  phenomena.  To  this  Socrates  replies,  as  if  by 
sudden  inspiration,  that  perhaps  the  connexion  is 
not  /jb€0e^c<;,  after  all,  but  the  ideas  are  to  be  thought 
of  as  irapahei^fxara  earcora  iv  rfj  (f>va€t,  also  that 
particulars  partake  of  ideas  in  virtue  of  resemblance 
and  nothing  else.  But  even  this  brilliant  suggestion  is 
of  no  avail  so  long  as  he  holds  that  the  predication  of 
likeness  involves  the  existence  of  an  idea,  bv  reason  of 
which  the  particulars  resemble  each  other  and  the  idea. 
The  infinite  regress  meets  us  still,  and  we  have  made 
no  progress. 

But,  says  Parmenides,  the  greatest  difficulty  of  all 


8  THE   SEARCH    FOR    KNOWLEDGE 

is  yet  to  come.  If  ideas  are  to  be  avrd  tcad'  avrd, 
separately  existent  apart  from  particulars,  then  they 
are  altogether  remote  from  the  sphere  of  human 
thought  and  action,  and  cannot  possibly  serve  as  ob- 
jects of  human  knowledge:  if  they  have  relations,  they 
are  related  to  one  another  only,  and  have  no  intercourse 
with  the  things  of  sense  which  are  said  to  resemble 
them.  Yet,  without  a  belief  in  their  existence,  what 
hope  is  there  of  attaining  to  truth  ?  There  must  be 
eternal  fixities  somewhere  on  which  the  mind  can  rest, 
and  before  Socrates  can  hope  to  attack  so  great  a 
dilemma  as  this  his  intellect  must  be  trained  and  dis- 
ciplined by  the  severest  logical  method. 

We  have  seen,  then,  that  the  first  portion  of  the 
Parmenides  expresses  considerable  dissatisfaction  with 
the  earlier  statement  of  the  ideal  theory,  and  at  the 
same  time  throws  out  various  suggestions  with  a  view 
to  its  amendment.  Whither  all  this  self-criticism  is 
tending  has  not  yet  become  clear,  but  the  main  results 
may  be  summarised  as  follows.  In  general,  we  note  a 
pronounced  hesitation  in  admitting  elhrj  avrd  kcl6" 
avrd  of  every  predicate,  coupled  with  a  tendency  to 
distinguish  between  different  classes  of  elhrj ;  secondly, 
we  have  an  assurance  from  Parmenides  that  there  will 
come  a  time  when  Socrates  will  not  disdain  the  lowliest 
things  of  nature.  In  particular,  it  is  shown  that  the 
inseparable  connexion  of  ideas  with  the  possibility  of 
predication  cannot  be  reconciled  with  any  view  of  the 
nature  of  the  ideas  (and  we  may  therefore  suppose  that 
Plato  henceforward  dispenses  with  that  connexion) ; 
secondly,  that  the  doctrine  of  immanence,  if  understood 
literally,  is  inconsistent  with  the  nature  of  the  idea, 


THE   SEARCH   FOR   KNOWLEDGE  \) 

whether  it  be  transcendentally  existent,  or  a  vorjfjLa  in 
the  human  mind,  whereas  the  expression  fxi^rjai^,  pro- 
vided there  be  no  necessity  to  postulate  an  idea  for 
every  predicate,  is  perhaps  less  open  to  objection ; 
thirdly,  that  the  eZSo?  avro  /ca0'  avro  can  never  be 
merely  a  vorj^xa  in  the  human  mind,  for  a  vorj/ia  implies 
an  object,  an  existent  something  beyond  itself,  and  this 
is  only  the  old  idea  back  again ;  fourthly,  that  the  ideas, 
although  they  have  been  completely  severed  from  the 
world  of  time  and  space,  are  yet  indispensable  in  the 
search  for  truth,  since  man  must  always  have  beyond 
him  a  goal  on  which  his  eyes  may  rest.  Without  some 
eternal  fixity  the  art  of  dialectic  must  perish. 

The  exact  relation  borne  by  the  hypotheses  of  the 
Parmenides  to  the  former  half  of  the  dialogue  has 
always  been  matter  of  dispute.  Ostensibly,  of  course, 
they  furnish  an  exercise  in  logical  discipline,  and  the 
method  employed  is  similar  to  the  propaedeutic  exercise 
of  hiavoia  in  the  Republic.  That  some  intimate  con- 
nexion, however,  exists  between  the  subject-matter  of 
the  two  parts  must  be  the  conclusion  of  all  who  take 
Plato  seriously.  It  will  be  remembered  that,  at  the 
very  beginning  of  the  dialogue,  Socrates,  relying  on  the 
theory  of  predication  that  is  stated  in  the  Republic, 
joined  issue  with  Zeno,  and  saw  no  difficulty  in  attribu- 
ting contrary  predicates  to  concrete  things,  but  that 
on  the  other  hand  he  did  think  it  impossible  that 
contrary  attributes  should  pertain  to  the  transcen- 
dental ideas  which  informed  particulars,  and  gave  them 
their  existence.  Such  being  the  state  of  mind  of 
Socrates  at  the  outset,  it  would  seem  reasonable  to 
look  for  some  solution  of  his  original  difficulty  in  the 


10  THE   SEARCH    FOR    KNOWLEDGE 

discussion  of  the  eight  hypotheses;  also,  inasmuch 
as  his  explanation  of  contrary  predication  as  connected 
with  ideas  has  completely  broken  down,  one  would 
expect  some  light  to  be  thrown  on  the  circumstances 
of  contrary  predication.  By  a  brief  enumeration  of  the 
salient  points  in  the  eight  hypotheses,  I  hope  to  show 
not  only  that  these  expectations  are  realised,  but  that 
considerable  progress  is  made  towards  the  solution  of 
the  great  dilemma  concerning  the  ideas  with  which 
the  first  part  closed. 

In  the  discussion  of  the  first  and  fourth  hypotheses, 
which  stipulate  the  existence  of  to  ev,  when  bv  implies 
self-identity  and  nothing  more,  we  find  it  impossible  to 
predicate  anything  either  of  to  ev  or  of  TaWa,  and 
where  predication  is  impossible,  knowledge  is  a  fortiori 
impossible.  On  the  other  hand,  from  the  reasoning  of 
Hypotheses  VI  and  Vlii,  we  conclude  that  if  to  ev  is 
supposed  to  be  utterly  non-existent,  it  is  equally  certain 
that  neither  predication  nor  knowledge  is  possible, 
whether  of  ev  itself  or  of  TaWa.  If,  however,  ev  be 
conceived  of  as  existing,  not  merely  in  self-identity, 
but  in  relation  to  TaWa,  all  manner  of  predication  may 
take  place  both  in  regard  to  ev  and  to  TaWa,  and 
knowledge  of  both  ev  and  TaWa  becomes  possible 
(Hyp.  II  and  in). 

Now  it  is  of  course  obvious  that  the  ev  of  Hypotheses 
I  and  iv  has  an  immediate  reference  to  the  ev  of  the 
Eleatic  Zeno,  and  that  the  inconsistencies  arising  from 
his  peculiar  position  are  here  conspicuously  exposed. 
We  are,  accordingly,  led  to  infer  that  to  ev  throughout 
the  hypotheses  refers  in  the  first  instance  to  the  one 
supreme  reality,  whether  it  be  conceived  according  to 


THE   SEARCH   FOR   KNOWLEDGE  11 

the  Eleatic  or  the  Platonic  scheme.  The  main  result 
of  the  six  hypotheses  mentioned  will  then  be  this. 
The  supreme  reality,  if  it  is  to  be  known,  must  have 
relations  with  every  form  of  reality,  and  must  have  a 
connexion  with  all  inferior  existences.  In  short,  the 
supreme  idea,  the  ISea  rdyaOov,  or  whatever  else  it  may 
be  termed,  is  known  only  in  conjunction  with  other 
ideas,  and  with  the  infinite  flux  of  sense.  Conversely, 
the  flux  of  sense  and  the  other  ideas  are  to  be  known 
only  in  so  far  as  they  are  related  to  the  one  supreme 
unity.  And  if  a  subordinate  idea  be  for  the  moment 
regarded  as  eV,  as  a  unity  apart  from  the  supreme  idea, 
it  too  is  to  be  known  only  as  it  enters  into  combination 
with  the  infinite  many. 

Hypotheses  v  and  vn  add  to  our  information  con- 
cerning this  supreme  unity.  From  Hypothesis  v  we 
learn  that  to  ev  may  have  a  negative  determination 
applied  to  it,  and  yet  be  capable  of  being  known,  and  of 
bearing  descriptive  epithets.  Here  we  have  of  course 
a  foretaste  of  the  justification  of  to  fjurj  bv  in  the  Sophist ; 
it  is  implied  that  negative  may  be  as  true  and  as 
valuable  as  positive  predicates.  Hypothesis  vn  points 
to  a  distinction  between  opinion  and  knowledge. 
Assertion  of  some  sort  is  shown  to  be  possible  even 
where  the  existence  of  an  all-embracing  unity  is  denied, 
inasmuch  as  the  plurality  of  things  may  be  gathered 
together  in  aggregates  (oy/coi),  each  of  which,  possessing 
an  apparent  unity,  enters  into  apparent  relationships 
with  itself  and  other  things.  Being  mere  aggregates, 
however,  they  have  no  organic  coherence  and  fall  to 
pieces  when  analysed. 

Such  is  the  main  outcome  of  the  discussion  of  the 


12  THE    SEARCH    FOR   KNOWLEDGE 

eight  hypotheses,  but  a  closer  inspection  reveals  direct 
reference  to  the  other  problems  that  are  before  Plato's 
mind.  In  the  first  place,  avro  to  ev  at  129  C  was 
taken  as  an  example  of  an  elSos  avro  kclO*  avro,  and 
Socrates  there  expressed  great  curiosity  to  know 
whether  the  idea  ev  could  be  shown  to  be  iroWd,  and 
whether  in  general  ideas  themselves,  in  contradistinc- 
tion to  particulars,  are  capable  of  diverse  predicates, 
i.e.  of  communion  with  one  another.  The  results  of 
the  hypotheses  are  an  ample  proof  that  such  predication 
is  possible,  and  that  kolvcovlcl  of  some  sort  must  exist : 
avro  to  eV,  to  be  known,  must  be  capable  of  receiving 
all  manner  of  predication,  and  of  entering  into  all 
kinds  of  relation.  But  for  the  final  discussion  of 
this  KOivcovia  we  must  look  to  the  later  Sophist  and 
Timaeus. 

Meantime  has  any  light  been  thrown  on  the  theory 
of  predication  itself?  In  a  very  significant  passage  at 
143  D,  E,  it  is  carefully  shown  that  as  soon  as  any 
notion,  however  simple,  comes  before  the  mind  for 
analysis,  number  is  at  once  generated,  and  the  mind  is 
forced  to  count.  The  notion  of  number,  then,  appears 
to  be  a  necessity  of  the  mind's  action.  This  principle 
applies  not  only  to  number,  but  to  all  predicates  of  a 
similar  kind,  as  the  whole  exposition  proves.  However 
slight  may  be  the  notion  under  examination,  however 
restricted  and  confined,  the  mind  in  passing  judgment 
is  forced  to  predicate  and  to  make  use  of  a  number 
of  common  terms  such  as  like,  unlike,  same,  other, 
which  express  the  various  relations  that  one  thing 
bears  to  another.  Hence,  though  no  dogmatic  teach- 
ing   about    predication    is    to    be    found,    it    is   taken 


THE   SEARCH   FOR   KNOWLEDGE  13 

for  granted  from  first  to  last  that  predication  is  a  sine 
qua  non  of  logical  analysis,  and  that  no  transcendental 
explanation  need  be  assumed. 

The  latter  half  of  the  Parmenides,  then,  has  made 
a  considerable  contribution  towards  the  solution  of  the 
problems  of  the  first  half.  Predication,  without  which 
knowledge  cannot  possibly  advance,  is  shown  to  be  a 
natural  activity  of  the  intellect,  and  the  use  of  predicates 
of  number,  likeness  and  difference,  equality  and  in- 
equality, etc.,  is  indispensable  to  the  consideration  of 
any  subject  whatsoever.  Moreover,  the  ideas  and  the 
supreme  idea,  if  they  are  to  be  not  merely  existent,  but 
objects  of  knowledge,  must  have  a  real  and  lasting 
relation  with  one  another  and  with  the  world  of 
sense.  Conversely,  the  world  of  sense,  in  so  far  as  it 
may  be  known,  must  be  regarded  as  entering  into 
relation  with  the  supreme  unity  and  its  determina- 
tions. 

Passing  on  to  the  Theaetetus,  we  are  confronted 
with  another  attempt  to  solve  the  problem  of  knowledge. 
The  Parmenides,  after  first  demonstrating  the  impossi- 
bility of  regarding  ecSn  avra  /ca6'  avra  as  objects  of 
knowledge,  so  long  as  they  retain  the  characteristics 
ascribed  to  them  in  the  Phaedo  and  the  Republic, 
proceeds  to  delineate  the  necessary  character  of  ecSr]  if 
they  are  to  be  not  merely  ovra  but  iiriar^rd.  The 
Theaetetus,  falling  back  on  the  general  question  "  What 
is  knowledge  ?,"  leads  by  a  process  of  exhaustion  to  the 
same  conclusion  as  the  Parmenides.  Whereas  in  the 
Parmenides  Plato  was  content  to  investigate  and 
partially  to  reconstruct  his  own  view  of  knowledge,  he 
is  now  determined  to  deal  no  less  faithfully  with  the 


0 


14  THE   SEARCH    FOR    KNOWLEDGE 

theories  of  others,  that  he  may  be  the  more  certain  of 
his  own  system.  Hence,  in  this  dialogue  and  in  the 
Sophist,  we  not  only  see  Socrates  endeavouring  to  test 
the  mental  productions  of  Theaetetus,  but  Plato  himself 
examining  the  soundness  of  his  predecessors  in  philo- 
sophy, resolved  to  discard  the  dross  and  retain  the  gold 
tried  in  the  furnace  of  his  dialectic. 

Theaetetus'  first  thesis  makes  €7rcarr]fi7)  identical 
with  aiadrjat^,  and  in  the  lengthy  conversation  that 
follows  we  have  an  estimate  of  the  value  attached  by 
Plato  to  the  perpetual  flux  of  sense.  By^a  combination 
of  Protagorean  with  Heracleitean  principles1  he  evolves 
a  theory  of  sensation  by  which  the  fact  of  sensation 
depends  entirely  on  the  juxtaposition  of  object  and 
subject;  to  alaOrjTov  and  to  aio-6avb\xe.vov  are  each  a 
movement  that  is  generated  by  the  contact.  Thus 
neither  the  sensation  of  whiteness  nor  the  colour  white 
has  any  existence  in  itself;  they  are  simply  the 
product  of  the  object  as  irotovv  and  the  subject  as 
iraayov.  As  a  result,  the  sensation  of  whiteness  is 
supposed  to  reside  in  the  eye,  and  the  colour  white  is 
projected  outwards  by  the  mind  and  made  to  inhere  in 
the  object. 

This  explanation  of  sensation,  which  cannot  be 
assigned  to  any  contemporary,  and  would  therefore 
appear  to  be  that  of  Plato  himself,  clearly  attributes  no 
permanent  reality  to  the  /civr)o-€is  of  perceiving  or  o|^ 
being  perceived :  they  are  yeveaet^  that  come  into  being 
and  again  depart,  varying  in  character,  not  only  with 
different  subjects,  but  with  the  same  subject  under 
different  circumstances.     We  conclude,  therefore,  that 

1  Theaet.  182  a,  b. 


THE   SEARCH   FOR   KNOWLEDGE  15 

hot  and  cold,  hard  and  soft,  wet  and  dry,  white  and 
black,  and  the  like,  have  no  absolute  existence;  they 
count  for  nothing  in  the  search  for  reality ;  they  are  but 
the  momentary  product  of  the  interaction  of  subject 
and  object.  Since  they  have  no  existence  except  in  the 
consciousness  of  the  percipient,  and  vary  indefinitely 
with  different  persons,  and  with  the  same  person  at 
different  times,  they  have  no  fixed  value,  and  cannot  be 
objects  of  knowledge.  This  argument,  besides  being  of 
supreme  weight  for  the  refutation  of  Theaetetus'  first 
thesis,  is  of  great  importance  as  indicating  the  tendency 
of  Plato's  thought ;  the  character  of  sensible  qualities 
as  secondary  products  of  the  activity  of  mind  is  main- 
tained throughout  the  later  dialogues,  and  finds 
expression  in  the  Laws1.  Moreover,  it  would  be 
superfluous,  in  the  light  of  this  exposition,  to  wonder 
"wKetlTer  Plato  still  has  recourse  to  an  immanent  idea  to 
make  a  particular  thing  white  or  hot  or  sweet,  as  the 
language  of  the  Phaedo  and  the  Republic  would  indicate. 
Such  qualities  now  possess  neither  fixity  nor  reality ; 
that  reality  of  a  kind  must  appertain  to  the  itolovv  and 
irdaxov  which  generate  them  is  proved  by  the  later 
Sophist,  and  marks  an  important  step  in  Plato's  develop- 
ment. 

The  interest  of  the  argument  next  centres  round/^/ 
Theaetetus'  second  thesis,  viz.,  eiriaTrjfiT]  is  to  6p6a 
8ol~d%€Lv.  Socrates  has  discovered  that  the  fact  of 
perception  is  not  concerned  with  sense  merely,  but  that 
the  soul  avrrj  8l  avTrjs  compares  the  data  of  sensation 
and  passes  judgment  upon  them,  assigning  or  denying 
to  them  certain  tcoiva,  or  general  predicates.     These 

1  Laws  897  a. 


\ 


16  THE    SEARCH    FOR    KNOWLEDGE 

fcoiva,  oixoloVj  avofioiov,  ev,  7r\f)0osy  etc.,  carry  our 
thoughts  back  to  the  Parmenides,  where  we  had  a 
practical  demonstration  of  the  fact  that  certain  general 
predicates  are  necessary  parts  of  the  soul's  machinery. 
The  general  aim  of  this  portion  of  the  dialogue,  then,  is 
to  show  that  true  opinion,  or  the  process  of  apprehending 
correctly  certain  kolvcl  of  relation,  does  not  constitute 
knowledge.  After  a  long  digression  on  the  nature  of 
false  opinion,  in  which  the  solution  of  the  Sophist, 
though  not  directly  stated,  is  nevertheless  implied,  and  in 
which  ho^a^eiv  is  shown  to  apply  not  merely  to  sensibles 
but  to  mental  abstractions  as  well,  the  main  thesis  is 
summarily  disposed  of  by  a  reference  to  the  rhetorical 
art.  A  man  may  conceivably  pass  a  true  judgment 
without  having  any  clear  grasp  or  realisation  of  the 
matter  at  issue.  True  opinion  may  be  a  factor  in 
knowledge,  but  we  have  not  yet  seized  upon  the  vital 
constituent. 

An  attempt  is  immediately  made  to  supply  the 
deficiency  by  the  addition  of  a  X0709,  i.e.,  some  verbal 
expression  of  the  content  of  true  opinion.  Various 
interpretations  of  the  word  X6709  are  then  mentioned ; 
X0709  may  mean  (a)  the  mere  verbal  utterance,  or 
(6)  the  enumeration  of  elements,  in  which  the  Cynics 
and  Socrates  supposed  knowledge  to  consist,  or  (c)  the 
definition  by  characteristic  difference,  Plato's  own  accep- 
tation of  the  term.  Each  of  these  processes  in  turn  is 
proved  to  be  insufficient  to  explain  the  fact  of  knowledge ; 
they  all  presuppose  the  existence  of  something  else 
which  is  known  and  is  the  object  of  knowledge,  whereas 
they  are  merely  subsidiary  to  its  attainment. 

We  are,  therefore,  forced  to  the  conclusion  that  no 


THE   SEARCH   FOR    KNOWLEDGE  17 

theory  of  knowledge  in  which  the  existence  of  ideas  is 
"not  assumed  can  hope  to  pass  the  test  of  criticism. 
Mere  sensation,  as  Heracleitean  and  Protagorean 
doctrine  alike  demonstrate,  can  never  furnish  a 
standard.  The  process  of  Sogd&tv,  or  apprehension  of 
relations,  may  be  useful  enough,  but  it  is  not  the  sum- 
total  of  knowledge.  Even  the  scientific  expression  of 
such  judgments  does  not  bring  us  any  nearer  the  goal. 
Our  only  hope  is  to  discover  as  quickly  as  may  be  the 
nature  of  those  elZrj  for  which  we  have  long  been 
seeking.  . 

In  the  Sophist  there  are  four  subjects  that  demand 
our  attention — the  method  of  SocdpeaLs,  the  problem  of 
/jlt)  6v,  the  fjiijiara  yevrj,  and  the  definition  of  ovcria  as 
r)  tov  iroLelv  r)  irdcryeiv  Svvcl/jlis.  All  of  these,  with  the 
exception  of  the  last,  are  concerned  with  the  method 
rather  than  the  object  of  knowledge,  and  hence  we  look 
to  the  Sophist  for  enlightenment  on  the  processes  of 
thought  and  predication  rather  than  for  an  exposition 
of  the  ideas.  The  method  of  StaLpeais,  proceeding  by 
subdivision  and  classification,  was  first  described  vaguely 
in  a  much  earlier  dialogue,  the  Phaedms,  and  there  it 
was  impressed  upon  us  that  the  essential  of  good 
hialpecris1  is  to  divide  /car  ap6pa  y  irefyvice  feat  /jltj 
eTTL^xetpeiv  Karayvvvat  fiepos  /JLTjSev.  The  same  rule  is 
enforced  in  the  hiaipeai^  of  the  Sophist,  as  well  as  in 
the  similar  process  in  the  Politicus.  The  mind,  in  virtue 
of  its  innate  power  of  distinguishing  ravrov,  Odrepov, 
o/jlolov,  avofjiotov  and  the  other  kolvcl,  starts  from  the 
observation  of  one  common  element,  and  then,  proceed- 
ing by  hiaipeais  icard  jjuepr],  seizes  on  the  characteristic 

1  Phaedrus  265  B. 
w.  2 


18  THE   SEARCH    FOR   KNOWLEDGE 

difference  of  the  object  to  be  defined.  All  definition 
must  be  preceded  by  Siaipeats,  and  since  definition  is 
the  verbal  expression  of  a  truth  which  is  known,  it 
follows  that  hiaipeGLs  will  be  an  important  adjunct  to 
the  process  of  knowledge  in  general. 

The  method  of  hiaipea^,  when  applied  to  the 
Sophist,  leads  to  a  consideration  of  the  problem  of 
fir)  ov,  and  finally  to  the  whole  question  of  predication. 
In  the  course  of  a  long  argument,  containing  criticisms 
of  the  Eleatic  and  various  other  schools,  it  is  proved 
that  bv  and  fir)  bv  may  not  merely  denote  Being  and 
Not-Being  in  the  absolute  sense,  but  may  signify  the 
positive  and  negative  determinations  respectively  of 
the  thing  to  which  they  are  applied.  "Ov,  in  short,  is 
copulative  as  well  as  substantive,  and  in  the  former 
sense  both  bv  and  fir)  bv  may  be  applied  to  the  same 
thing ;  fir)  bv  is  simply  Odrepov,  a  category  that  inheres 
in  all  existence. 

Closely  connected  with  the  subject  of  fir]  bv  is  the 
analysis  of  the  five  fieycara  <yevrj,  in  which  are  included 
the  final  analysis  and  solution  of  the  problem  of  pre- 
dication, to  which  there  have  been  continual  references 
in  the  Parmenides  and  Theaetetus.  He  that  would 
deny  the  possibility  of  predication  subverts  every 
attempt  to  form  a  theory  of  the  universe,  and  hence 
the  possibility  of  predication  must  be  accepted  as  a 
necessary,  axiomatic  truth.  But,  if  there  is  to  be 
predication,  we  must  concede  a  certain  /cotvcovla  or 
power  of  communicability  in  predicates,  since  the 
same  thing  is  capable  of  receiving  various  attributes 
and  of  entering  into  various  and  even  contradictory 
relations.     The  five  great  yevrj   or   categories    of    ov, 


THE   SEARCH   FOR   KNOWLEDGE  19 

ravrov,  ddrepov,  ardac^,  /civtjctls  are  then  distinguished, 
and  it  is  shown  that  ov,  ravrov  and  ddrepov  universally, 
and  ardai^  and  /clvtjgls  generally,  are  found  to  inhere 
together  in  the  same  thing,  and  hence  may  be  said 
to  have  communication  one  with  another.  But  al- 
though these  categories  are  termed  eiS?)  and  are  said 
to  KOivcovelv  the  one  with  the  other — the  requirement 
made  in  the  Parmenides  for  the  ideal  world  no  less 
than  the  sensible- — there  is  no  indication  whatever 
that  ravrov,  Odrepov,  etc.,  are  the  transcendental  ideas 
which  are  to  be  the  goal  of  knowledge ;  they  are 
instruments  merely  which  are  to  aid  in  the  search. 
When  we  come  to  the  Timaeus1,  indeed,  we  find  them 
definitely  classified,  not  as  ideas,  but  as  methods  of  the 
soul's  activity. 

The  conception  of  falsity,  too,  is  illuminated  in  the 
sections  that  follow.  Thought,  opinion,  and  imagina- 
tion are  all  sometimes  false,  but  this  falsity  consists 
not  in  the  assertion  of  not-being  or  nothing,  but  in 
the  attribution  of  things  that  are  not  as  though  they 
were. 

By  far  the  most  significant  teaching  of  the  Sophist 
is  to  be  found  at  p.  247  E,  and  the  sections  that  follow. 
The  materialists,,  who  believe  in  nothing  that  they 
cannot  seize  with  their  hands,  are  confronted  with  the 
elSoov  <j>l\ot,  who  place  ovaia  and  yevecris  at  opposite 
poles,  and  deny  that  there  can  be  any  communication 
between  them.  These  latter  are,  of  course,  the  supporters 
of  the  theory  of  ideas  as  originally  formulated  in  the 
Phaedo  and  Republic,  and  Plato,  now  bent  on  reconciling 
the  two  conflicting  modes  of  thought,  seeks  some  con- 

1  Tim,  35  a  seq. 

2—2 


20  THE   SEARCH    FOR   KNOWLEDGE 

ception  of  ovaia  which  may  bridge  the  gulf  that  yawns 
between  the  ideal  and  material  worlds.  Recalling  the 
doctrine  of  sensation  which  he  had  put  forward  in  the 
Theaetetus,  he  offers  a  novel  definition  of  ovaia,  viz., 
i)  rod  irotelv  rj  irdayeiv  7Tpo?  to  a/JbiKporarop  hvvafiLS. 
Ylotelv  and  iraayjciv  are,  of  course,  manifested  in  various 
forms,  and  refer  both  to  the  physical  activity  and 
passivity  of  sense,  and  to  the  psychical  ycyvooa/cetp 
and  ryt<yvcoaK€a6at.  It  is  to  be  noted,  however,  that 
whereas  the  mind  or  soul  in  sensation  is  iraaypv,  in  the 
region  of  knowledge  it  is  itoiovv,  and  the  object  of  its 
knowledge,  ovaia,  is  rcaayov.  But  the  main  argument 
centres  in  the  fact  that  subject  and  object  are  equally  in 
movement,  and  are  therefore  equally  real  forms  of  ovaia, 
A  further  step  is  taken  at  p.  249.  Anything  that 
is  6vtu>s  ov  must  surely,  says  Plato,  possess,  not  merely 
movement,  but  vov$,  £corj,  and  yjrvxv  as  well.  The 
statement  is,  of  course,  an  echo  of  that  theory  of  soul  as 
being  the  first  and  only  source  of  movement  which  was 
formulated  first  in  the  earlier  Phaedrus 1  and  remained 
to  the  end  the  permanent  basis  of  Plato's  philosophy 2. 
The  important  result  in  the  present  instance,  however, 
is  the  inevitable  inference  that  not  merely  rj  tyvxh  V 
yiyvojafcei,  but  to  yiyvcoa/cofjuevov,  whatever  it  be,  is  akin 
to  vov<$  and  ^corj  and  -v^f%^,  and  must  therefore  be  a 
form  or  manifestation  of  soul.  Even  the  objects  of  sense, 
despised  though  they  be  because  of  the  Heracleitean 
flux,  may  now  serve  a  purpose  in  the  progress  of  know- 
ledge. Since  they  too,  in  some  mysterious  way,  are 
TTotovvTa,  no  less  than  yfrvxr/,  there  must  be  a  reality  of 
some  sort  underlying  them ;  and  we  have  been  assured 
1  Phaedrus  245  c.  2  Laics  896  seq. 


THE   SEARCH    FOR   KNOWLEDGE  21 

that  the  highest  reality  of  all  is  to  be  found  in  the  nature 
of  mind  and  soul. 

But  though  activity,  life,  soul,  mind  are  inseparable 
from  the  ovtws  ov,  we  must  be  careful,  says  Plato,  not 
to  refuse  it  also  the  attributes  of  permanency  and 
stability.  If  these  were  lacking,  truly  our  newly-found 
reality  would  be  little  better  than  the  peovra  of  sense, 
and  make  us  despair  once  more  of  attaining  to  know- 
ledge. Reality,  it  is  true,  is  possessed  of  activity  and 
life,  but  that  life  and  activity  are  manifested  under 
permanent  conditions  and  according  to  eternal,  immu- 
table modes  (/cara  ravra  /cat  ojctclvtcos  teal  irepl  to 
avro).  Hence  neither  motion  nor  rest  is  the  exclusive 
attribute  of  the  6Wg>?  ov. 

To  sum  up  the  results  of  our  investigation,  we  have, 
first  of  all,  justified  predication  on  the  ground  of 
necessity,  and  have  vindicated  the  right  of  the  soul  to 
pass  judgment  on  any  data  supplied  to  her  without  the 
mediation  of  any  exalted  and  mysterious  existences 
called  ideas.  Next,  in  regard  to  the  ideas,  it  was  found 
at  the  beginning  of  the  Parmenides  that  so  long  as  the 
idea  possesses  the  characteristics  ascribed  to  it  in  the 
Phaedo  and  Republic,  knowledge  must  be  forever  be- 
yond jour  .reach,  and  yet  that  unless  the  existence  of  an 
idea  of  some  sort  be  assumed,  knowledge  must  remain 
equally  impossible.  The  Theaetetus  corroborated  this 
by  showing  successively  that  neither  sensations,  nor 
those  common  forms  of  predication  which  are  essential 
to  the  activity  of  thought,  nor  yet  the  scientific  expres- 
sion of  thought  by  definition,  connotative  or  denotative, 
can  in  themselves  constitute  knowledge ;  they  are  the 
instruments,  not  the  objects,  of  knowledge.     We  are, 


'22  THE   SEARCH   FOR   KNOWLEDGE 

therefore,  obliged  to  postulate  ideas,  and  there  is  not 
wanting  a  hope  that  their  true  nature  will  finally  be 
revealed,  considerable  illumination  having  already  been 
gained  from  the  Parmenides  and  the  Sophist  For  the 
ideas  of  the  older  time  are  being  divided  up  into  classes. 
The  predicates  bv  and  ixrj  6V,  6/jlolov  and  avofjuotov,  and 
the  like,  are  found  to  be  fxeytara  yevrj,  forms  of  thought, 
essential  modes  of  the  soul's  activity,  and,  though  they 
may  retain  the  old  title  of  etSrjy  they  are  very  different 
in  kind  from  the  eiSy  avra  kcl6'  avra  of  the  Phaedo, 
nor  do  they  carry  the  significant  attributes  of  the  latter. 
Sensible  qualities,  being  simply  yeveaeus,  have  no  fixity 
at  all,  and  cannot  assume  the  importance  even  of  the 
/jbeytcrra  yevr].  Ethical  conceptions  of  ayadov,  kclkov, 
and  the  like,  are  in  the  ordinary  way  obtained  chiefly 
through  a  diligent  comparison  of  past  and  future1,  and 
are  relative  to  circumstance ;  on  the  other  hand,  there 
is  a  reference  to  avrrj  StKatocrvpr],  avrr)  dSt/cia  at 
Theaetetus  175  C.  It  is,  therefore,  uncertain  for  the 
present  whether  there  are  still  to  be  ideas  of  moral 
notions  or  even  of  natural  species,  though  in  regard  to 
these  last  we  have  been  told  that  the  meaner  things  of 
nature  have  an  equal  claim  to  respect  with  the  greater. 
Under  these  circumstances  it  can  hardly  be  denied 
that  the  ideal  doctrine  of  the  Republic,  in  which  there 
was  an  idea  for  every  predication,  did  not  stand  for  any 
eternal  and  unassailable  truth  even  in  Plato's  own  mind. 
One  may  almost  say,  in  the  words  of  Jowett 2,  that  the 
earliest  ideas  were  only  a  "  semi-mythical  form  in  which 
he  attempts  to  realise  abstractions,"  and  they  certainly 

1  Theaet.  186  a,  b. 

2  Introd.  to  Cratylus,  p.  623. 


THE   SEARCH    FOR    KNOWLEDGE  23 

were  to  a  large  extent  "  replaced  by  a  rational  theory 
of  psychology."  Plato,  however,  is  bent  on  retaining  the 
machinery  and  terminology  of  the  ideal  theory;  the 
assumption  of  these  eternal  existences  is  still  indis- 
pensable, if  he  is  to  explain  the  universe  at  all.  With 
the  aid  of  the  ideas  he  kept  the  Sophists  and  Cynics  at 
bay  while  he  deliberated  about  his  answer  to  their  most 
pressing  question,  viz.,  "  What  is  Predication  ? " ;  and 
the  ideas  must  still  be  his  stimulus  and  inspiration  if 
he  is  yet  to  satisfy  them  on  the  deeper  subjects  of 
Knowledge  and  Being. 

For  the  present,  therefore,  we  are  assured  that  the 
ideas  still  exist,  though  they  are  fewer  in  number  than 
heretofore.  Furthermore,  reality,  both  as  knowing  and 
as  known,  as  acting  and  as  being  acted  upon,  has  been 
declared  to  be  of  the  nature  of  mind,  and  it  is  in  the 
light  of  these  two  general  observations  that  we  shall 
now  proceed  to  interpret  the  ontology  of  the  dialogues 
that  follow. 


ESSAY  II. 

THE  ANALOGY  OF  THE  ARTS  AND  ITS  APPLICATION 
IN  THE  POLITIC  US  AND  PH1LEBUS. 

A  favourite  and  effective  device  of  Plato,  when 
intent  on  the  elucidation  of  ethical  and  metaphysical 
truth,  is  to  introduce  one  or  other  of  the  constructive 
or  imitative  arts  to  serve  as  an  illustration.  In  the 
earlier  dialogues  simile  and  application  are  alike  simple : 
the  statesman  is  the  pilot  of  the  state,  the  philosopher 
is  the  doctor  of  souls,  and  so  on.  But  as  Plato's  powers 
matured,  and  his  aims  grew  more  ambitious,  he  began 
to  make  a  more  elaborate  and  significant  use  of  this 
instrument.  At  the  beginning  of  Republic  x,  for  instance, 
the  constructive  art  of  the  carpenter  and  the  imitative 
art  of  the  painter  serve  to  illuminate  the  nature  of 
the  ideas,  and  the  kind  of  relation  borne  by  them  to 
the  world  of  sense.  The  6e6$,  who  is  parallel  to  the 
carpenter,  makes  the  ideal  bed,  which  is  one  and 
imperishable ;  the  re/crcov,  taking  the  ideal  bed  as  his 
7rapdS€cyfjia  or  model,  constructs  a  material  bed ;  while 
the  painter,  with  only  the  material  bed  as  his  model, 
makes  an  image  which  is  in  the  third  degree  removed 
from  ideal  truth.  The  immediate  purpose  of  this,  of 
course,  is  to  degrade  mimetic  art  considerably,  and  to 


THE   ANALOGY   OF   THE   ARTS  25 

place  it  far  below  constructive  art  in  the  scale  of  truth  ; 
incidentally,  however,  Plato  has  shown  how  valuable 
an  ally  the  arts  may  become  in  the  exposition  of  the 
ideas.  This,  coupled  with  the  intimation  we  had  in 
the  Parmenides  that  the  ideas  might  be  TrapaSeiryfiara 
iarcora  ev  rrj  (frvcrei,  and  that  ixi\xr)<Ji<$,  rather  than 
fjLe6e%L$,  should  describe  the  relation  borne  to  them  by 
<yiyv6/jL€va,  would  reasonably  lead  us  to  expect  a  more 
extensive  use  of  this  metaphor  in  the  dialogues  we  are 
now  considering.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  Plato  in  the 
Politicus  and  the  Philebus  is  very  largely  dependent  on 
constructive  art  for  the  adequate  expression  of  his 
doctrine.  In  the  present  paper,  therefore,  I  propose 
to  examine  the  application  of  this  analogy  in  these 
dialogues,  hoping  that  in  the  sequel  some  further  light 
may  have  been  thrown  on  the  nature  of  the  ideas,  and 
consequently  on  the  system  of  knowledge  which  is  the 
goal  of  our  endeavours. 

The  first  object  for  our  consideration  will  be  a 
remarkable  passage  in  the  Politicus,  in  which  Plato 
gives  utterance  to  his  high  estimation  of  an  art  which 
has  already  come  prominently  forward  in  the  Protagoras1 
--the  art  of  measurement.  At  283  B,  Socrates,  in  order 
co  show  his  respondent  that  their  digression  on  the  art 
of  weaving  was  not  too  lengthy,  declares  that  the  whole 
nature  of  excess  and  defect  must  be  made  clear.  In 
the  first  place,  he  says,  measurement  of  excess  and 
defect  is  of  two  kinds,  the  first  being  that  which  deals 
with  relative  size  and  merely  compares  one  object 
writh  another,  the  other  that  which  judges  things 
according    to    their    approximation    to    a    perpiov,    a 

1  Protag.  356  d. 


26  THE   ANALOGY   OF   THE   ARTS   AND   ITS 

mean,  a  fixed  standard.  The  latter  is  by  far  the 
more  important ;  in  fact,  it  is  the  principle  upon  which 
all  yeveo-Ls,  all  production,  is  based,  and  without  it  the 
arts  could  not  exist.  Every  artist  strives  to  attain  a 
standard,  and  in  so  far  as  he  falls  short  of  this  standard, 
is  his  work  faulty  and  bad.  Excess  and  defect  are  real 
evils,  and  to  guard  against  them  is  the  first  necessity 
of  art. 

Now  it  is  plain  that  the  usual  connotation  of  perpiov 
and  of  fjL€Tpr)TL/cf/  has  been  considerably  extended  in 
this  exposition.  At  the  outset,  to  /juerpcov  would  seem 
to  signify  a  unit  or  norm  of  measurement,  in  reference 
to  which  things  relatively  great  or  small  may  be 
accurately  measured.  But  this  simple  meaning  is  soon 
superseded,  for  at  284  A  seq.  we  learn  that  the  arts 
make  use  of  to  /meTpiov,  not  as  a  norm  or  unit  of 
measurement,  but  as  an  ideal,  a  standard,  by  the 
attainment  of  which  alone  things  dyaOa  and  fcdXd  are 
produced.  Hence  fxeTp^Tifcr],  in  this  new  Platonic 
sense,  is  not  merely  an  art  of  measurement,  but  an  art 
which  compares  the  productions  of  Te^xyv1  with  to 
irpkirov  teal  to  8eov.  It  is  a  critical  science,  which 
passes  judgment  on  aicevacrTd  in  virtue  of  a  fixtd 
standard,  with  which  it  is  acquainted.  At  the  same 
time  it  is  to  be  noticed  that  the  connexion  of  fjbeTpijTLKrj 
with  spatial  and  mathematical  measure  is  apparently 
maintained  throughout,  inasmuch  as  it  is  described  at 
the  final  summing-up2  as  including  oiroaai  rkyyai  tov 
dptdfjiov  Kal  /jLTj/crj  Kal  j3a6rf  teal  ttXcittj  7rpo?  to  fieTptov 
teal  to  nrpeirov  Kal  top  tcaipov  fieTpovcri.  In  short,  to 
fieTptov,  in  relation  to  the  arts,  is  an  ideal  standard, 
1  284  e.  2  284  e. 


APPLICATION   IN   THE   POLITIGUS  AND   PH1LEBUS     27 

consisting  of  certain  fixed  mathematical  combinations, 
or  proportions,  to  which  the  products  of  the  arts  should 
approximate. 

Such  being  clearly  the  significance  of  to  fierpcov  in 
the  arts,  our  next  step  will  be  to  determine  its  value 
when  employed  in  the  demonstration  of  metaphysical 
truth.  At  284  D  Socrates  expresses  his  conviction 
that,  at  some  future  time,  this  notion  of  to  fierptov  will 
be  called  into  requisition  Trpcs  rrjv  irepl  avro  ravpcftes 
airohet^iv.  We  therefore  expect  to  hear  more  of  it, 
and  our  expectation  is  fully  realised  in  the  Philebus. 

At  16  B,  c,  of  the  Philebus  there  occurs  a  remarkable 
reference  to  the  process  of  hialpeaLs,  of  which  Socrates 
remarks1,  ?;?  iyco  ipaarrjs  el  fit,  del.  This  method  has 
been  responsible  for  every  great  discovery  of  the  arts, 
and  it  is  based  on  the  principle  that  ev  and  7ro\\a  are 
to  be  found  everywhere,  and  that  irepas  and  anreipov, 
limit  and  infinity,  are  inherent  in  the  very  nature  of 
things.  It  is,  therefore,  the  duty  of  the  dialectician  to 
posit  one  elSos  for  every  infinity  of  particulars,  and  not 
to  rest  satisfied  until  he  has  discovered  the  definite 
number  (oVocra)  of  species  that  are  to  be  inserted 
between. 

This  general  reference  to  irepa^  and  airetpov,  as 
representing  in  the  abstract  that  which  can  be  accu- 
rately estimated  and  defined,  as  contrasted  with  that 
which  defies  determination  and  classification,  prepares 
us  for  the  more  abstruse  discussion  of  these  notions  at 
23  c  seq.  At  this  point  of  the  dialogue  Socrates  has 
proved  that  to  dvOpcoirivov  dyaOov  (the  discovery  of 
which  is  the  sole  aim  of  the  treatise),  is  to  be  identified 
1  Cf.  Phaedrus  266  b. 


28  THE   ANALOGY    OF   THE    ARTS    AND   ITS 

with  neither  of  the  two  claimants,  vovs  and  rjhovrj,  in 
separation,  but  that  it  must  consist  in  a  fii/cro?  ySto?, 
which  is  the  compound  of  both.  It  is  at  the  same  time 
maintained  by  Socrates  that  the  ingredient  in  this 
Ijluctos  /3to?  which  makes  it  ayaObv  is  more  akin  to 
vovs  than  to  rjSovrj,  and  that,  if  this  can  be  proved,  the 
life  of  reason  must  be  awarded  the  second  prize.  With 
a  view  to  demonstrating  this  superiority  of  vovs  over 
7]Sov7],  he  proposes  to  examine  both,  and  to  place  them, 
according  to  their  merits,  in  one  or  other  of  four  classes, 
within  which,  he  says,  irdvra  rd  vvv  ovtcl  iv  to5  ttclvti 
are  contained. 

Now  the  classification  here  referred  to,  in  which  the 
notions  of  irepas  and  dirupov  reappear,  is  primarily  a 
dissection,  as  it  were,  of  the  universe  based  on  meta- 
physical principles.  Such  is  the  immediate  inference 
one  draws  from  the  impressive  manner  in  which  the 
subject  is  introduced  (top  8eov  eXe^yofjuev  irov  to  fjuev 
aireipov  Sell; at  tcop  ovtcov,  to  Se  vrepa?),  and  from  the 
fact  that  the  first  intimation  of  the  division  into  direipov 
and  ivepa^  came  as  a  suggestion  regarding  the  solution 
of  those  inconsistencies  which  marred  the  theory  of 
ideas.  Moreover,  the  divisions  themselves  accord  most 
easily  with  this  interpretation.  It  is  not  the  first  time 
that  the  notions  diretpov  and  Trepan  have  been  conjoined 
in  a  metaphysical  analysis  of  reality.  In  the  second 
and  third  hypotheses  of  the  Parmenides,  where  a 
similar  classification  is  evolved,  there  is  an  undoubted 
reference  to  metaphysical  theory2.  There  we  find  ev 
representing  the  supreme  ideal  unity,  and  TaKka  the 
world  of  phenomena,  also  the  adjectives  ireirepaafjiiva 
1  15  a,  b.  2  Parm,  144  e;  158  d. 


APPLICATION   IN   THE   P0L1TICUS  AND   PHILEBUS    29 

and  airetpa  applied  as  essential  characteristics  to  raXka. 
These  four  correspond  in  inverse  order  to  the  airetpov, 
rrepa^,  /jliktov  and  atria  of  the  Philebus.  Our  conclu- 
sion is  reinforced  again  by  the  fact  that  the  fourth 
and  greatest  class,  the  atria  rr)s  /u£efc>9,  is  proclaimed 
to  be  vovs,  which  governs  both  universe  and  individual, 
since  our  examination  of  the  Sophist1  has  proved 
indisputably  that  vovs  is  henceforward  to  have  the 
pre-eminence  in  Plato's  explanation  of  the  universe. 

Since  the  classification  then  appears  to  rest  on  a 
metaphysical  basis,  one  would  expect  to  find  the  meta- 
physical principle  faithfully  adhered  to  throughout. 
Plato's  avowed  object  in  this  dialogue,  however,  is  not 
metaphysical  but  practical ;  he  wishes  to  arrive  at  a 
logical  determination-of  the  avQpunrivov  <z<ya06v.  Hence 
the  metaphysical  classification  throughout  the  argument 
is  made  subservient  to  practical  considerations,  and  it 
is  apparently  appropriated  simply  in  order  that  some 
unique  authority,  as  it  were,  may  support  Socrates 
in  his  estimate  of  the  three  different  lives.  This 
peculiarity,  combined  with  the  generally  confused 
and  fragmentary  state  of  the  dialogue,  makes  it  ex- 
tremely difficult  to  arrive  with  certainty  at  the  original 
significance  of  the  four  yivrj.  The  ybiicrbv  761/09,  which 
should  properly  include  only  the  unions  of  metaphysical 
aireupa  and  irepara,  is  made  to  contain  the  /U/CT09  /3io<;, 
a  union  of  an  aireipov,  r/Sovtj,  not  with  irepas,  but  with 
an  airia  (vovs)  ;  rjbovrj2,  too,  is  classed  at  one  time  under 
ro  airetpov,  at  another  under  ro  pmcrov ;  and  at  26  A,  B, 
oopa,  which,  in  so  far  as  it  denotes  a  certain  atmospheric 
state,  is  surely  to  be  ranked  with  ^ei^oov  and  ttvI^o^  in 
1  Soph.  249  a  seq.  2  27  e  ;   31  a,  b,  c. 


30  THE   ANALOGY   OF   THE   ARTS   AND   ITS 

a  table  of  metaphysical  valuations,  is  separated  from 
them  on  the  fanciful  ground  that  good  things  cannot 
be  classed  with  arreipa,  which  are  evil.  It  is  clear  that 
the  same  principle  of  classification  is  not  maintained 
throughout.  Plato  has,  in  fact,  for  the  purposes  of 
the  dialogue,  turned  a  set  of  metaphysical  distinctions 
into  a  loose,  popular  classification ;  and,  since  our  aim 
is  to  arrive  at  his  metaphysical  teaching,  we  must 
endeavour  to  describe  the  four  yevrj  as  they  appear 
when  divested  of  those  inconsistencies  which  are 
peculiar  to  the  dialogue. 

It  must,  first  of  all,  be  noted  that  the  whole 
classification  here  is  based  upon  the  analogy  of  the 
constructive  arts.  The  universe  is  regarded  as  a  living 
/coo-fxos,  a  whole  compounded  of  body  and  soul,  and 
containing  within  it  all  inferior  bodies  and  souls. 
Within  this  icoo-fios  is  going  on  continually  a  process 
of  fjbl^i<;  or  yeveats  (the  very  word  used  for  artistic 
production  in  the  Politicus),  and  all  the  four  kinds  of 
ovra  of  which  to  irav  consists  are,  in  one  capacity  or 
another,  involved  in  this  yeveais.  Now  it  was  shown 
in  the  Politicus  that  the  first  essential  of  every  art  is  a 
fierpiov,  or  ideal  standard,  in  accordance  with  which 
the  particular  product  is  fashioned.  Besides  this, 
however;  we  know  that  there  is  needed  first,  v\r),  or 
to  TrpooToyeves  KTrj^a  of  Politicus  288  E,  e£  wv  koX  ev 
ol?  SrjfjLLovpyovGLV  oiroaat  twv  re^vcov  vvv  etprjvrat ; 
secondly,  the  opyava  crvvairca  of  Politicus  287  D ;  and 
thirdly,  the  artist  or  SrjfjLLovpyos  himself.  Of  these  to 
IxeTpiov  undoubtedly  corresponds  to  irepas  in  the 
Philebus,  inasmuch  as  it  is  definitely  identified  with  it 
at  24  c  and  66  A,  and  is  moreover  described  as  being 


APPLICATION    IN   THE   P0LIT1CUS  AND   PHILEBUS    31 

the  cause  of  fjuerptorrj^  and  av/jt^erpia1  in  its  fit/crd. 
The  artist's  vXtj  is  to  be  correlated  with  the  avreipov, 
into  which  to  ire  pas  is  said  to  enter,  thereby  producing 
a  fiiKTov  compounded  of  both2.  The  whole  language 
of  the  passage  implies  that  irepas  is  applied  to  diretpov 
as  form  to  material.  That  the  alria  is  parallel  to  the 
871/jLLovpyos  follows  obviously  from  its  description3  as  to 
ttoiovv  and  to  iravra  tcl  ytyvofieva  Brjfxtovpyovv.  As 
to  the  opyava  avvalria,  some  doubt  may  at  present 
exist  as  to  their  identification,  but  we  cannot  go  far 
wrong  in  connecting  them,  provisionally  at  least,  with 
the  Trepas,  which,  in  company  with  to  diretpov,  is  called 
to  SovXevov  eh  yeveatv  atria*.  A  more  complete  ana- 
lysis of  all  these  conceptions  must  now  be  attempted. 

Beginning  then  with  the  class  of  vXr),  what  is  the 
essential  nature  of  to  arreipov,  and  what  things  are 
included  in  it  ?  Socrates  tells  us  that  it  is  the  class  of 
to  /jtaXXov  real  tjttov,  and  that  the  quality  of  indefmite- 
ness  is  inherent  in  it.  Its  nature  is  such  as  to  forbid 
any  application  of  rkXos  or  iroaov ;  as  soon  as  any  such 
notion  is  connected  with  it,  it  loses  its  characteristic 
and  ceases  to  be  what  it  is  (avrco  TereXevrrjicaTov). 
The  class  is  made  up  of  Oepfiorepov  /cal  yjrv^poTepop, 
%r)poTepov  Kal  vyporepov,  TrXeov  /cat  eXarrov,  Qclttov 
Kal  /3paSvT€pov,  fjtel^ov  /cat  afit/cporepov,  and  the  like, 
of  everything,  in  fact,  that  admits  of  to  acf)68pa  /cat  to 
rjpe/jta.  To  rjSv  /cal  to  Xvirrjpov,  therefore,  would  come 
under  the  same  category5 — a  fact  which  is  explicitly 
acknowledged  by  Socrates  quite  apart  from  any  reference 
to  the  quantitative  hedonism  of  Philebus.     At  31  B,  it  is 

1  64  e  ;   65.  2  24  c,  d.  3  26  e  ;  27  b.  4  27  a. 

5  28  a;    31  a;    41  d. 


32  THE   ANALOGY    OF   THE   ARTS   AND   ITS 

true,  there  is  a  temporary  lapse  of  consistency,  and  he 
speaks  of  it  as  a  yuicTov,  but  there,  as  in  other  places, 
the  metaphysical  interest  has  been  superseded,  and 
Socrates  is  looking  at  pleasure  and  pain  as  concrete 
facts,  and  is  seeking  to  define  them  on  a  popular  basis. 

Now  this  talk  of  hotter  and  colder,  drier  and  wetter, 
with  the  accompanying  statement  of  their  indefmiteness 
and  of  the  impossibility  of  applying  to  them  any  fixed 
character,  takes  our  minds  back  to  the  earlier  part  of 
the  Theaetetus,  where  all  the  qualities  dependent  on 
sensation  came  in  for  a  vigorous  examination.  As 
a  result,  we  found  that  all  these  qualities,  being  due  to 
a  /clvrjcTLs  between  subject  and  object,  had  no  existence 
except  in  the  consciousness  of  the  percipient.  They 
were  subjective  phenomena,  varying  indefinitely  with 
different  subjects  and  therefore  possessing  no  fixed 
value.  Their  apparent  externality,  too,  was  due  to  the 
percipient  subject  alone,  which  projected  outside  itself 
a  something1  which  could  not  have  come  into  being  apart 
from  itself.  To  aireipov,  then,  is  the  class  of  hotter  and 
colder,  of  subjective  affections,  which  vary  indefinitely 
and  have  no  claim  on  real  existence.  The  comparative 
form  in  which  they  are  expressed  serves  to  stamp  them 
with  the  mark  of  unceasing  variableness,  and  one  feels 
inclined,  with  Natorp2,  to  see  in  them  a  striking  re- 
semblance to  the  oy/cot,  of  the  Parmenides  3,  which  bear 
relation  to  one  another  only,  and  of  which  the  least 
part,  as  well  as  the  greatest,  is  branded  as  infinity. 

Sensible  qualities,  then,  in  general,  serve  as  vkr)  in 

1  Theaet.  156  e  seq. 

2  Natorp,  Plato's  Ideenlehre  (Leipzig  1903). 

3  Parm,  164,  165. 


APPLICATION   IN   THE   POLITIGUS  AND   PHILEBUS     33 

the  production  of  the  fit/era  of  the  universe.  But 
there  are  not  wanting  certain  signs  which  show  that 
a  far  more  subtle  conception  is,  at  any  rate,  at  the  back 
of  Plato's  mind,  even  though  it  may  not  as  yet  have 
taken  definite  shape.  At  24  D  we  hear  of  rj  rod  fxaXKov 
fcal  tjttov  eh  pa,  into  which  to  iroaov  and  to  pieTpuov 
are  supposed  to  enter,  and  which  evidently  is  that 
which  affords  a  place,  a  home,  for  these  ciiretpa,  such 
as  they  are.  Now  it  is,  of  course,  impossible  to  con- 
ceive of  anything  as  subject  to  infinite  fluctuation,  like 
the  airetpa,  without  at  the  same  time  allowing  to 
it  extension  of  some  kind,  in  which  the  fluctuations 
may  take  place;  we  should  remember,  moreover,  that 
to  fxel^ov  teal  o-fii/cpoTepov1  is  one  of  the  airetpa,  and  the 
eSpa  of  an  ajretpov  of  this  sort  would  be  very  definitely 
extension,  and  nothing  else.  Hence  the  eSpa  must 
inevitably  be  identified  with  extension,  the  home  of 
fluctuation  and  Becoming,  although  the  slight  use 
made  of  it  at  this  juncture  forbids  us  to  lay  any  great 
stress  on  the  conception  at  present.  The  final  analysis 
of  extension  does  not  concern  Plato  in  the  Philebus, 
and  he  may  or  may  not  have  intended  to  make  it  the 
nre^TTTov  yevos  which  is  mentioned  so  casually  at  23  D. 
The  vXtj,  then,  of  the  world-process  is  in  the 
Philebus  made  to  consist  of  sensible  qualities,  with 
a  slight  but  unmistakeable  reference  to  a  eSpa,  in 
which  the  qualities  reside,  and  which  is  the  inevitable 
condition  of  the  yeveaus  of  the  jjulktcl.  In  fact,  there 
would  seem  to  be  here  a  distinct  use  of  the  two  functions 
of  vXrj  which  are  mentioned  at  Politicus  288  D  (e£  &v 
koX  iv  oh  Srj/jbLovpyovatv  al  Teyyai). 

J25  c. 
w.  3 


34      THE  ANALOGY  OF  THE  ARTS  AND  ITS 

We  now  come  to  the  class  of  irepas,  and  here 
a  difficulty  awaits  us,  although  it  would  at  first  sight 
seem  quite  easy  to  identify  it  with  to  /juerpiov  of  the 
Politicus.  Here,  as  elsewhere  in  the  dialogue,  Plato 
does  not  seem  to  have  one  clear  conception  in  mind 
throughout.  The  class  as  a  whole  is  styled  to  ire  pas, 
or  the  limit.  But  as  early  as  24  c  we  hear  of  two 
sorts  of  ire  pas,  called  respectively  to  ttogov  and  to 
fierptov,  the  very  names  of  which  indicate  a  difference 
in  kind.  Our  knowledge  of  the  Politicus  naturally 
makes  us  think  of  to  fieTptov  as  an  ideal  standard, 
dependent  indeed  upon  mathematical  determinations, 
but  only  in  the  sense  that  a  law  is  dependent  upon  the 
material  in  which  it  finds  expression.  That  the  same 
signification  attaches  to  it  here  would  seem  to  follow 
from  its  equation  with  to  KaLpiov  and  rj  al'Sios  (frvo-cs 
at  66  A.  As  for  iroaov,  it  would  appear  to  signify 
quantity,  or  magnitude,  and  nothing  further. 

This  distinction  within  to  irepas  is  immediately  borne 
out  by  the  special  mention1  of  to  ire  pas  e^ov,  that  which 
contains  or  possesses  limit,  and  rj  tov  irepaTos  yevva2,  the 
offspring  of  limit,  which  are  evidently  identical  with 
each  other  and  with  to  iroaov.  The  examples  which 
Plato  cites,  to  laov,  to  harXaaiov,  /cal  Trap  6  tl  irep  av 
rrpos  apiOfjidv  dpiOfxos  rj  /jueTpov  fj  irpbs  fxeTpov,  are  all 
mathematical  determinations,  just  the  relations  that 
are  essential  to  the  expression  of  a  mathematical 
proportion  or  law,  such  as  the  p,€Tpiov  of  the  Politicus 
was  found  to  be. 

We  cannot,  therefore,  go  far  wrong  in  dividing  to 
Trepas  into  two  classes,  to  [xeTpcov  and  to  iroaov,  the  first 
1  24  a.  2  25  d. 


APPLICATION   IN   THE   P0LIT1CUS  AND   PHILEBUS     35 

representing  the  ideal  law  which  governs  the  production 
of  fjbc/crd,  the  second  the  mathematical  magnitudes  and 
relations  through  which  it  works.  This  conclusion  finds 
special  confirmation  in  the  language  of  a  succeeding 
passage,  for  at  26  D  the  whole  process  of  plfys  is  described 
as  a  "  generation  into  existence  out  of  numerical 
relations  established  with  the  agency  of  limit"  (yeveats 
eh  ovcriav  itc  rcov  jxera  rod  Treparos  direipyacrpbevoyv 
lierpoiv).  The  perpiov  of  the  artist,  then,  is  parallel 
to  the  fjuerpiov  that  governs  the  yeveo-cs  of  the  universe, 
and  which  is  an  immaterial  law,  finding  best  expression 
in  a  later  sentence  of  the  dialogue 1 :  k6o~plo$  tis 
daoouaTOS  ap^cov  koXoos  ipyjrv^ov  aoo/jLaros ;  and  the 
opyava  awaiTta  are  surely  nothing  else  than  the  iroad, 
the  Treparos  yevva,  which  are  the  indispensable  instru- 
ments through  which  the  pbirptov  operates. 

The  class  of  pluctcl  should  not  detain  us  long,  for 
they  are  a  multitude  in  number  2,  and  the  most  easily 
identified  of  all.  They  cover  the  whole  realm  of  concrete 
existence,  and  include  every  discoverable  species  of  the 
natural  world.  Unfortunately,  however,  Plato  has  here 
signally  failed  in  clearness  of  thought  and  language, 
and  at  this  juncture  of  the  argument  he  seems  to  be 
governed  entirely  by  the  practical  considerations  of  the 
dialogue,  leaving  out  of  sight  the  metaphysical  principle 
on  which  the  division  is  primarily  based.  Since  the 
Iilktos  ^to?,  upon  which  the  whole  argument  bears,  is 
not  a  natural  fitrcrov,  but  an  imaginary  conception,  it 
is  only  pLucra  of  this  kind  that  he  chooses  to  cite  as 
examples,  things  which  are  patera,  not  in  a  meta- 
physical, but  in  a  figurative,  sense.  Acting  thus  on 
1  64  b.  2  26  c. 

a— 2 


36  THE   ANALOGY   OF   THE   ARTS   AND   ITS 

the  popular  belief  that  all  evil  is  airetpov,  all  good 
Treirepaa/jievov,  he  mentions  vyteia,  /cdWos  and  la^vs 
as  typical  members  of  the  mixed  class ;  whereas  the 
whole  trend  of  the  argument  is  to  show  that  these 
words  signify,  not  jjuktcl  themselves,  but  attributes 
which  attach  to  them  when  they  are  faithful  copies  of 
to  fierpiov.  They  are  the  scientific  terms  applied  by 
the  mind  in  its  capacity  of  critic,  and  are  therefore  to 
be  classed  with  vovs  as  a  part  of  its  machinery.  As 
for  /jiovorcfCT],  it  is  obviously  out  of  place  among  the 
/jbtfcra  here.  Movcri/crj  is  a  constructive  art,  and  it  is 
constructive  art  that  supplies  the  analogy  upon  which 
this  whole  classification  of  the  physical  universe  is 
based;  nothing  could  be  more  unreasonable  than  to 
introduce  a  simile  as  part  of  its  application.  We  are 
satisfied,  therefore,  that  fiL/crd,  in  strictness,  represent 
natural  substances  and  nothing  more. 

With  regard  to  the  alrta,  which  corresponds  to  the 
Srj/jLLovpybs  of  the  arts,  we  are  told  in  indisputable 
language 1  that  it  is  vovs  and  nothing  else.  But  what 
aspect  of  vovs  ?  At  this  crisis  of  the  argument  Socrates 
declares  in  most  impressive  language  that  the  universe, 
so  far  from  being  ruled  by  blind  force,  is  controlled  by 
a  universal  vovs  and  ao^ia,  and  that  this  universal  z/ov? 
is  the  source  of  our  inferior  intelligences,  just  as  surely 
as  our  bodies  are  derived  from  its  body.  Clearly  then 
the  cause  of  the  universe  is  inseparably  connected 
with  the  universal  vovs,  but  not,  I  may  remark,  with 
the  universal  vovs  regarded  as  separate  from  the  uni- 
verse ;  the  vov$  of  30  a  seq.  is  not  only  present  in  all 
things,  but   is   distributed   especially   into   the   finite 

1  Phil.  30  c. 


APPLICATION   IN   THE   POLITICUS  AND   PHILEBUS     37 

souls  of  men.  The  dvOpwinvo^  vovs  is  bound  up  with 
the  universal  vovs,  and  shares  with  it  the  function  of 
atria,  just  as  in  the  Sophist1  divine  and  human  vovs 
alike  are  centres  of  activity. 

In  other  passages,  of  course,  where  the  alria  rrjs 
/u£ew?  is  not  in  question,  we  find  the  divine  vov$ 
regarded  as  something  apart  from  the  universe,  as 
pure  intellectual  activity2,  that  which  represents  the 
most  divine  life  of  all.  But  this  aXrjOivos  ko\  Oetos 
vov$  suffers  neither  pleasure  nor  pain,  and  is  liable  to 
none  of  those  affections  which  limit  the  capacities  of 
men.  Its  entire  separation  from  the  influences  of  body 
raises  it  above  all  participation  in  the  physical  universe. 
The  divine  reason  in  this  aspect,  therefore,  cannot  be 
the  universal  1/0O9  distributing  itself  into  finite  intelli- 
gences, nor  can  it  be  regarded  as  mingling  airetpa 
(subjective  phenomena)  with  iroad  (mathematical  re- 
lations peculiar  to  the  human  intellect)  in  order  to 
produce  material  things.  The  Oelos  vovs,  considered 
as  pure  intellect  in  continual  activity,  is  single  and 
separate ;  but,  in  its  character  of  alria  tt}?  /u^eo)?,  it 
must  be  regarded  as  multiform,  and  as  acting  through 
the  subordinate  intelligences  of  which  it  is  the  source. 

Our  analysis  of  Plato's  four  yevr)  thus  results  in 
a  view  of  the  universe,  and  of  the  material  things  of 
which  it  is  composed,  as  a  generation  and  as  a  mixture 
of  certain  ingredients  brought  about  by  a  definite  agent. 
Material  things  are  compounds  of  sensible  qualities  and 
mathematical  determinations,  fused  together  by  the 
universal  vovs,  regarded  as  acting  plurally  through 
the  inferior  minds  into  which  it  is   subdivided,  and 

1  Soph.  248  e.  2  22  c. 


38  THE   ANALOGY   OF   THE   ARTS   AND   ITS 

as  copying  an  immaterial  ideal  law  which  expresses 
itself  in  the  mathematical  relations  aforesaid.  Here 
truly  is  an  explanation  of  phenomenal  existence  which 
in  subtlety  and  power  far  transcends  the  older  theory, 
in  which  we  were  told,  indeed,  of  an  infinite  world  of 
ideas,  but  which  threw  no  light  whatever  on  the 
function  or  modus  operandi  of  those  ideas. 

Some  doubt  has  existed  as  to  whether  the  doctrine 
of  the  Philebus  admits  of  ideas  at  all,  and  the  four 
yivT]  have  been  regarded  as  a  by-product  of  Plato's 
thought.  A  careful  consideration  of  the  class  of  irepas, 
however,  combined  with  the  knowledge  that  the  im- 
perative necessity  of  revising  the  ideal  theory x  was  in 
Plato's  mind  as  he  wrote,  leads  us  to  the  conclusion 
that  in  the  Trepan  he  had  at  last  arrived  at  a  conception 
of  the  ideas  which  his  critics  were  powerless  to  assail. 
To  this  it  has  been  frequently  objected  that  the 
difficulty  of  15  B,  viz.,  that  the  idea  exists  both  apart 
from,  and  immanent  in,  particulars,  is  not  thereby 
removed.  Such  an  objection,  however,  does  not  ap- 
pear to  take  account  of  the  division  of  to  Trepas  into 
to  fieTptov  and  to  ttogov,  of  which  to  /leTptov  alone 
represents  the  idea,  to  iroaov  the  instrument  of  its 
operation.  Transcendence  and  immanence  are  still  its 
characteristics,  but  the  new  explanation  of  its  nature 
practically  reconciles  the  two.  The  law  of  proportion 
which  governs  the  production  of  a  pllktov  is  certainly 
something  other  than  the  pmcTov  itself,  removed  from 
it  as  far  as  the  ideal  is  removed  from  the  material,  but 
it  is  also  in  a  sense  immanent  in  the  pllktov,  since  it 
gives   to   the   latter   its   characteristics,  and    is   itself 

1   15   B. 


APPLICATION   IN   THE   POLITIGUS  AND   PHILEBUS     39 

illustrated  therein  in  virtue  of  its  representatives,  the 
iroaa.  Such  then  is  the  character  of  the  idea  as 
portrayed  in  the  Philebus ;  it  is  a  law  of  mathe- 
matical proportion  which  governs  the  generation  of 
phenomenal  things,  that  is,  not  merely  a  scientific 
generalisation  attained  through  observation  and  experi- 
ment, but  rather  an  eternal  necessity  inherent  in  the 
very  nature  of  a  thing  and  expressing  its  peculiar 
reality.  Further  light  on  this  notion,  however,  must  be 
reserved  till  we  come  to  the  examination  of  the  Timaeus. 

An  important  question  remains.  Of  what  things 
are  there  ideas  of  this  sort,  and  where  is  the  line  to  be 
drawn  ?  To  this  the  exposition  of  the  yevrj  seems  to 
provide  a  clear  answer.  There  are  ideas  of  all  finer  a, 
and  the  fitKra  of  the  material  universe  are  surely 
every  species  of  natural  substance,  whether  animate 
or  inanimate,  organic  or  inorganic.  The  mere  fact 
that  sensible  qualities,  mathematical  relations,  mind 
and  all  its  activities  in  art  and  science,  are  to  be  found 
outside  the  class  of  fierptov  serves  to  rule  them  out  of 
the  list  of  ideas ;  and  of  these  the  first  two  classes  were 
already,  in  the  Theaetetus,  Parmenides,  and  Sophist, 
banished  from  the  realm  of  the  ideas. 

A  few  words  should  be  said  in  regard  to  two  classes 
of  existences  which  are  not  included  in  those  mentioned 
above.  The  first  of  these,  cnc^vaaTa,  of  which,  like  every-  - 
thing  else,  there  were  ideas *  in  the  time  of  the  Republic, 
seems  since  then  to  have  declined  in  importance.  In 
the  critique  of  the  Parmenides2  Socrates  apparently 
does  not  think  it  worth  while  even  to  mention  them, 
and  the  same  applies  to  Philebus  15  A.  They  have,  it 
1  See  Crat.  389  a.  2  Parm.  130  c. 


40  THE   ANALOGY   OF   THE    ARTS   AND   ITS 

is  true,  served  a  purpose,  and  no  slight  one,  in  affording 
a  striking  analogy,  which  Plato  has  used  with  effect  in 
both  the  Philebus  and  the  Timaeus,  for  the  elucidation  of 
the  ideal  doctrine.  It  is,  however,  quite  incredible 
that  Plato  should  have  included  them  in  the  fxt/cra  of 
the  universe,  which  are  subject  to  the  fierpiov  imposed 
by  universal  vovs.  If  they  are  to  be  placed  in  tne 
yevr]  at  all,  it  must  be  as  an  appendage  to  the  class  of 
vovs,  which,  as  we  gather  from  66  B,  includes  iTriarrjfjLat 
and  re^vac  of  all  sorts,  and,  presumably,  their  products 
also. 

The  other  class  of  existences  referred  to,  that  of  to 
vyietvov,  to  dya06v,  to  koKov,  etc.,  is  of  far  greater 
importance,  and  certainly  of  greater  philosophical 
significance,  since  they  have  served  as  typical  examples 
of  ideal  reality  from  the  time  of  the  Symposium  onwards1. 
They  are  not,  however,  natural  fiiKTa,  and,  consequently, 
it  is  impossible,  from  the  point  of  view  of  the  Philebus, 
to  attribute  to  them  a  fxeTpcov  in  the  same  sense  in 
which  it  applies  to  the  others.  In  order  to  determine 
their  essential  nature,  we  must  examine  for  a  moment 
the  conception  of  Good  as  revealed  at  the  close  of  the 
dialogue.  At  64  A  there  is  thrown  out  a  hint  to  the 
effect  that  by  an  analysis  of  a  special  jjluctov,  viz.,  the 
/MtcTos  /3/o?,  we  may  hope  to  learn  tl  ttotc  ev  T6  dvOpcoiray 
teal  tS  ttclvtl  7T6(pvK6v  dyaOov  zeal  Tuva  iSeav  clvttjv 
elvai  7tot€  /jbavTevTeov.  Then  follow  immediately  the 
three  criteria  by  which  a  thing  is  judged  to  be  good 
or  the  reverse.  These  criteria,  in  contradistinction  to 
the  popular  requirements  of  Tekeiov,  l/cavov,  aipeTov, 
have  a  metaphysical  bearing,  and  are,  first  of  all, 
1  Cf.  Theaet.  175  c ;  Phil.  15  a  ;  62  a. 


APPLICATION   IN   THE   POLITICUS  AND   PHILEBUS     41 

aXrjdeta,  secondly,  /jberptorr]^,  and  thirdly,  av/JL/Jb€Tpia. 
Now  it  is  obvious  from  the  confused  arrangement  of 
the  passage  that  these  three  notions  are  employed 
loosely,  and  that  they  are  in  reality  closely  akin  to  one 
another,  being  different  aspects  of  the  same  thing. 
'AXrjdeia,  in  Plato's  strict  usage,  always  implies  corre- 
spondence with  an  ideal  reality,  and  that  this  is  its 
application  here  seems  to  follow  from  the  fact  that  the 
principle  of  valuation  is  no  longer  popular,  but  meta- 
physical. MerpLOTrjs,  if  we  are  to  keep  to  the  new 
sense  of  fxerpcov  established  in  the  Politicus  and  the 
Philebus,  will  mean  the  quality  of  being  /juerpiov,  or 
of  conforming  to  to  /jLerpcov,  i.e.,  the  ideal  standard; 
whereas  crv^ixerpla,  the  condition  of  a  whole  when  its 
parts  are  duly  proportioned,  will  represent  the  material 
aspect  of  /jLETpcoTTj^1,  since  it  is  conformity  with  the 
ixerpiov  that  makes  the  particular  ingredients  percept- 
ibly symmetrical.  It  is,  accordingly,  clear  that  there 
is  in  reality  only  one  criterion  of  the  good.  The  most 
general  term  for  it  is  akrjOeta,  which  signifies  approxi- 
mation to  the  ideal.  The  expression  most  characteristic 
of  the  Philebus  is  fjuerpLorr]?,  since  it  implies  the  special 
interpretation  of  the  ideal  which  the  Philebus  presents. 
Finally,  /jLerpLorr)?  reveals  itself  in  the  concrete  par- 
ticular as  av^fjuerpia,  or  harmonious  relation  of  parts, 
and  is,  in  this  aspect,  the  cause  of  kclWos.  The  test 
of  goodness,  then,  in  the  material  universe  at  least,  is 
approximation  to  the  fjuirpiov,  and  this  test,  says  Plato, 
holds  whatever  be  the  (jllktov  under  consideration. 
Hence  to  ayaOdv  and  to  /cdWos,  when  applied  to  the 
jxiKTa  of  the  universe,  are  no  longer  suprasensual 
realities ;  they  are  rather  part  of  the  machinery  of  a 

1  See  25  e. 


42  THE   ANALOGY   OF   THE    ARTS   AND   ITS 

particular  science,  a  science  of  per  pr)T  tier),  whose  func- 
tion it  is  to  compare  things,  not  with  one  another,  but 
with  the  absolute  fierpiov  which  is  the  law  of  their 
existence.  In  the  Politicus  we  became  acquainted 
with  a  science  of  art-criticism,  which  looked  upon  all 
divergence  from  the  standard  as  an  evil,  which  must  in 
all  cases  be  avoided ;  and  now  we  find  that  there  is  a 
still  higher  ixerpr^TtKr},  a  science  of  ideal  aesthetics, 
whose  business  it  is  to  judge  the  yiyvofieva  of  the  world 
in  the  light  of  the  absolute  idea.  But  the  Good  and 
the  Beautiful  are  not  ideas,  which  inhere  in  fiitcrd,  and 
thereby  make  them  materially  good  and  beautiful ; 
they  are  simply  terms  of  relation,  a  part  of  the 
machinery  which  every  art  must  have,  and  they  are  to 
be  ranked,  not  with  the  ideas,  but  with  the  Te%z/<z£, 
which  are  an  appendage  to  vovs.  In  the  region  of 
ethics,  indeed,  we  have  yet  to  show  that  Plato  was  to 
the  end  faithful  to  his  belief  in  a  supreme  avro  dyaOov 
or  its  equivalent :  in  the  Timaeus  we  are  presented 
with  his  final  standard  of  moral  goodness.  But,  in 
everything  that  concerns  the  physical  excellence  of 
ycyvofieva,  he  is  now  content  to  point  to  the  fxerpcov  of 
each  thing  as  the  supreme  test  of  its  value. 

We  have,  therefore,  in  succession  excluded  from 
the  ideal  world  sensible  qualities,  relations,  objects  of 
iTTLo-TrjixaL  and  T€%vai,  aKevaard,  and  also  the  terms 
good  and  beautiful  and  their  opposites ;  and  the  word 
eZSo?  or  Ihea  is  henceforward  to  be  applied  especially 
to  the  organic  types  of  nature,  and  all  species  of  natural 
substances. 

But  what  steps  must  be  taken  in  order  to  discover 
these  fjuerpca  ?  If  Plato  means  them  to  take'  the  place 
of  the  old  iheat  as  objects  of  knowledge,  how  are  they 


APPLICATION   IN   THE   POLITICVS  AND   PHILEBUS     43 

to  become  known  to  us  ?  Surely  in  the  way  which 
Plato  himself  has  indicated.  At  a  very  early  stage1  of 
the  dialogue  Socrates  brings  up  the  eternal  question  of 
the  One  and  the  Many,  and  Protarchus,  with  youthful 
ardour,  is  anxious  to  attack  it  then  and  there  in  its 
most  subtle  form,  viz.,  in  its  application  to  the  theory 
of  ideas.  The  only  way,  says  Socrates,  to  unravel  the 
mystery  of  the  One  and  the  Many  in  any  form  is  to 
make  use  of  the  old  method  of  hiaipea^,  which  he  had 
employed  many  a  time  in  his  search  for  truth,  in  the 
region  of  politics  and  ethics  no  less  than  in  metaphysics. 
Limit  and  unlimitedness  are  present  everywhere,  not 
only  in  the  physical  universe,  but  in  the  realm  of  know- 
ledge too :  the  very  method  of  definition  is  founded  on 
a  recognition  of  the  two  principles.  Whatever  then  it 
be  that  we  seek  to  know,  let  us  posit  one  genus  for  it, 
and  then  in  the  light  of  this  genus  resolve  the  indefinity 
of  the  individual  representatives  into  a  definite  number 
of  species,  among  which  the  object  of  our  search  will  be 
found.  The  true  nature  of  /juerpta  is  accordingly  to  be 
discovered  by  the  use  of  this  supremely  efficient  instru- 
ment ;  careful  analysis  of  the  indefinity  of  particulars 
will  reveal  the  nature  of  the  species,  as  well  as  of 
the  genus.  The  fxerpcov  of  either  is  the  eternal  law  of 
proportion  which  governs  it,  and  it  cannot  but  reveal 
itself  to  him  who  makes  search  with  diligence.  Of  so 
much  we  are  for  the  present  assured :  but  for  a  com- 
prehensive view  of  the  whole  scheme  of  knowledge  and 
of  its  detailed  dependence  upon  the  theory  of  ideal 
Being,  we  must  look  to  the  Timaeus,  which  now  awaits 
our  consideration. 

1  14  c  seq. 


ESSAY   III. 

THE   WOKLD-PEOCESS   OF   THE    TIMAEUS. 

In  our  consideration  of  the  Philebus  we  were  called 
upon  to  regard  the  world  as  the  result  of  a  process  or 
generation  analogous  to  that  which  is  concerned  with 
production  in  the  arts.  The  universe,  we  were  told,  is 
a  ycyvo/jievov,  a  product  brought  into  being  by  the 
agency  of  vovs,  which  combines  sensible  qualities  with 
mathematical  relations,  and  makes  them  conform  to 
certain  fierpta,  or  eternal  laws  of  formation.  In  the 
myth  of  the  Timaeus  we  find  this  doctrine  not  merely 
reiterated,  but  extended  and  developed  in  the  greatest 
detail,  and  with  a  far  more  elaborate  use  of  the  symbol- 
ism with  which  we  are  already  acquainted.  The  whole 
cosmos,  with  all  its  various  interrelated  parts,  in  all  its 
activities  both  great  and  small,  is  spread  out  before  us 
in  one  of  the  most  magnificent  allegories  that  the  world 
has  ever  seen.  Abstract  conceptions,  which  in  the 
Sophist  were  presented  to  us  in  logical  simplicity,  are 
here  displayed  in  the  picturesque  dress  of  personifica- 
tion ;  the  universe  is  represented  as  being  constructed 
after  a  material  fashion  out  of  the  immaterial  elements 
into  which  Plato  has  analysed  it  in  thought.  Our 
present  object  is  to  make  a  general  estimate  of  the 
purport  of  the  myth,  reserving  for  separate  treatment 


THE   WORLD-PROCESS   OF   THE    TIMAEUS  45 

its  bearing  upon  Plato's  final  statement  regarding  the 
nature  of  knowledge. 

A  brief  resume  of  the  story  till  the  end  of  c.  xvi1, 
which  marks  a  definite  break  in  the  exposition,  is  the 
first  essential.  First  of  all,  says  Plato,  it  behoves  us  to 
draw  a  distinction  between  that  which  is  and  that 
which  becomes,  between  to  ov  ael,  yeveauv  S*  ov/c  eyov, 
and  to  yiyvo/jLevov  fiev  aei,  ov  he  ovheiroTe  :  the  first 
is  apprehended  by  reason  alone,  the  second  is  the 
object  of  opinion  and  irrational  sensation.  To  which 
of  these  does  the  universe  belong  ?  Surely,  since  it 
is  visible  and  tangible,  and  generally  apprehensible  by 
Soga  and  alaOrjcrts,  to  that  which  is  ytyvo/juevov  and  not 
ov.  But  the  peculiarity  of  the  phenomenal  is  that  it 
always  has  an  aWla,  hence  one  must  be  found  for  the 
universe.  Moreover,  a  thing  can  only  be  fair  when  the 
Srj/juovpyds  who  fashions  it  takes  the  ideal  as  his  model ; 
that  the  universe  is  fair  no  one  can  dispute;  it  is 
icaXkio-Tos  tcov  yeyovoTcov.  Therefore,  whatever  be  its 
cause,  the  ideal  must  be  the  model  upon  which  it  is 
built. 

Now,  in  order  that  the  universe  might  be  koXov,  its 
ah  La,  or,  to  adopt  the  language  of  "  production,"  artificer 
produced  in  it  harmony  and  measure,  and  also,  seeing 
that  of  sensible  things  that  which  possesses  vovs  is 
always  superior  to  that  which  has  it  not,  he  placed  vovs 
in  yfrvxv  and  yfrv^v  in  crco^a,  since  apart  from  tyvxv 
Z/0O9  cannot  inhere  in  anything.  As  for  the  TrapdSety/jLa, 
in  imitation  of  which  the  world  was  fashioned,  it  is  a 
£cbov,  the  all-embracing  vorjTov  %coov,  containing  in 
itself  all  other  vorjTa  £<ba,  to  koWlcttov  twv  voovfjLevcov. 

1  Tim.  47  e. 


46  THE    WORLD-PROCESS   OF    THE    TIMAEUS 

As  for  the  crcoyua  of  the  cosmos,  it  is  composed  of 
the  whole  sum  of  fire,  air,  earth  and  water.  These  four 
ingredients  are  essential,  since,  although  two  only,  fire 
and  earth,  are  requisite  for  visibility  and  tangibility, 
two  others  must  be  added  as  means  in  order  to  make 
the  resultant  body  a  perfect  unity.  This  body  is  a 
perfect  whole  made  up  of  perfect  parts;  and,  seeing 
that  it  includes  within  itself  all  animals,  it  possesses 
that  shape  which  comprehends  all  other  shapes,  viz., 
the  spherical.  It  has  no  need  of  organs,  but  revolves 
upon  its  own  axis  in  a  uniform  circular  motion,  the 
motion  most   typical  of  the   action  of  vovs  and  $po- 

V7]CTL<;. 

But,  although  we  have  spoken  of  tyvxv  as  being 
placed  within  body,  we  do  not  therefore  imply  that 
(Tcofia  is  older  or  of  greater  importance  than  yfrv^V 
which  inheres  in  it.  The  truth  is  rather  to  be  expressed 
in  this  way  :  ^v^V  rules  over  aco^a,  and  penetrates  it 
through  and  through.  It  is  composed  of  three  ingre- 
dients ;  the  aixepLo-TOs  and  del  Kara  ravrd  eyovva 
ovo-lci,  and  that  which,  being  divided  in  material  bodies, 
is  ycyvofjievov,  ov  8e  ovheirorey  are  mingled  with  a  third 
form  of  ovaia  which  is,  like  them,  compounded  of 
ravrbv  and  Odrepov1.  These  three  forms  of  ovaia  the 
artificer  welded  together  into  a  unity,  hard  though  it 
was  to  mingle  Odrepov  with  ravrov.  Further,  he 
divided  the  mixture  thus  formed  into  portions  corre- 
sponding to  the  intervals  of  the  diatonic  scale;  after 
which,  the  whole  of  soul  being  divided  into  two  halves, 

1  This  rendering  of  the  sentence  beginning  rrjs  djuepiarov  (35  a) 
has  the  authority,  among  ancient  commentators,  of  Proclos  and 
Plutarch  (7repi  rrjs  iv  TifAaiip  xf/vxoyovias,  c.  25). 


THE   WORLD-PROCESS  OF   THE    T1MAEUS  47 

he  laid  them  across  one  another  in  the  shape  of  the 
letter  X,  and  formed  of  them  two  intersecting  circles. 
The  one  of  these,  which  revolved  to  the  right  by  way 
of  the  side,  he  called  the  circle  of  ravrov,  that  which 
revolved  to  the  left  diagonally,  the  circle  of  Odrepov. 
To  the  circle  of  ravrbv  he  not  only  gave  supremacy 
over  the  circle  of  Odrepov,  but  he  left  it  single  and 
undivided,  whereas  the  circle  of  Odrepov  was  cleft  into 
seven  concentric  circles  corresponding  to  the  orbits  of 
the  seven  planets. 

Next,  in  order  to  make  the  k6o-\ios  resemble  still 
more  its  eternal  TrapaSeiy/jua,  he  produced  within  it  an 
everlasting  image  of  eternity,  which  has  been  named 
time,  and  for  the  measurement  of  which  he  fashioned 
the  planets  which  revolve  in  the  seven  orbits  of  Odrepov. 
All  these,  together  with  the  fixed  stars,  are  living 
deities,  spherical  in  shape,  composed  chiefly  of  fire,  bat 
whereas  the  fixed  stars  follow  the  motion  of  the  Same 
only,  which  is  most  like  to  the  activity  of  reason,  the 
planets  are  endowed  with  the  motions  of  Same  and 
Other  both. 

The  universe,  however,  was  not  yet  complete,  for  as 
many  varieties  of  ISeat  as  vovs  beholds  in  the  avrb 
%coov,  so  many  the  artificer  thought  should  be  contained 
in  the  oparov  £ooov ;  and  of  these  there  are,  besides  the 
Oelov  yevos  of  stars,  three  inferior  classes,  viz.,  the  tribes 
which  inhabit  the  air,  the  water,  and  the  earth.  With 
a  view  to  the  making  of  these,  he  called  together  the 
race  of  heavenly  stars,  and,  addressing  them  as  Oeol 
Oewv,  showed  how  ro  irav  could  not  be  truly  irav  until 
there  were  placed  within  it  the  inferior  animals  also ; 
yet  he  himself  could  not  make  these,  for  they  would 


48  THE   WORLD-PROCESS   OF   THE    TIMAEUS 

thus  become  the  equal  of  the  deities  themselves,  whose 
bodies  had  been  rendered  indissoluble  by  his  own  will. 
Consequently  to  the  stars  he  assigned  the  duty  of 
moulding  for  the  vorjrd  £coa  such  bodies  as  were 
appropriate  for  them,  as  well  as  the  task  of  providing 
them  with  sustenance,  and  of  receiving  them  again  at 
death.  But,  before  he  committed  to  the  deities  the 
immortal  principle  of  the  £coa,  he  took  such  portion  of 
the  three  ingredients  as  was  left  over  from  the  former 
mixture,  and,  having  compounded  it  in  less  perfect 
proportions,  he  divided  the  whole  into  individual  souls 
equal  in  number  to  the  fixed  stars.  These  souls,  being 
placed  each  in  one  of  the  stars  as  in  a  chariot,  were 
then  shown  the  nature  of  the  universe  and  its  inevitable 
laws :  how  that  they  should  each  be  planted  in  one  of 
the  planets,  and  that  it  was  given  to  them  to  choose 
how  they  would  live;  if  they  lived  in  righteousness, 
they  should  hereafter  return  to  their  kindred  star  and 
be  happy,  but  if  otherwise,  they  must  pass  in  graduated 
stages  first  into  the  form  of  a  woman,  and  thereafter 
into  the  forms  of  beasts  in  due  order,  according  to  their 
manner  of  life.  Then  the  planetary  gods,  obeying  the 
command  of  their  father,  made  mortal  bodies  of  the 
four  elements  they  found  in  the  universe,  and  these 
bodies  they  made  so  far  as  possible  in  the  image  of 
the  cosmic  and  starry  bodies,  placing  the  circles  of 
ravrov  and  Odrepov  within  the  spherical  body  called 
the  head.  At  birth  the  soul  of  the  creatures  thus 
made  was  overcome  with  disorder  and  tumult,  owing  to 
the  disturbances  caused  by  the  influx  of  nourishment 
and  the  impact  of  external  sensations.  The  circle  of 
the  Same  was  impeded  and  the  circle  of  the  Other 


THE   WORLD-PROCESS   OF   THE    TIMAEUS  49 

distorted,  so  that  neither  Reason  nor  Sensation  func- 
tioned correctly.  In  time,  however,  the  commotion 
abated  and  the  motions  of  the  Same  and  Other  resumed 
their  proper  course  ;  then  might  such  a  soul,  if  it  used 
its  opportunities  aright,  attain  to  the  excellence  of 
knowledge  and  intellectual  liberty. 

All  the  rest  of  the  body,  hands,  feet,  and  sense- 
organs,  were  given  merely  to  minister  to  the  comfort 
of  the  head,  which  was  its  divinest  part.  Sight  and 
hearing,  and  all  our  senses,  were  bestowed  for  this  one 
purpose,  that,  through  observing  the  orbits  of  heavenly 
beings,  we  might  be  enabled  to  order  aright  the 
revolution  of  reason  in  our  own  souls,  and  pursue  divine 
philosophy,  the  greatest  gift  of  God  to  men. 

So  much  will  suffice  for  an  examination  of  the  main 
principles  of  the  myth  ;  the  detailed  physical  exposition 
that  follows  may  well  claim  our  attention  in  a  separate 
paper.  First  of  all  a  word  or  two  must  be  said  as  to 
the  claims  of  this  story  to  be  considered  as  an  allegory 
at  all.  Such  a  view  of  it  is  assuredly  no  novelty,  for  it 
apparently  prevailed  in  the  Platonic  school  from  the 
time  of  Aristotle  onwards.  The  latter  refers  distinctly 
to  such  an  interpretation  in  de  Caelo1 ;  Plutarch,  too, 
though  maintaining  a  literal  interpretation  himself2,  is 
obviously  conscious  that  the  opposite  view  was  the 
favourite  among  his  contemporaries.  Aristotle,  in  de 
Caelo,  pours  contempt  upon  those  who  compare  the 
simile  of  creation  in  time  to  a  diagram,  in  explanation 
of  which  tense-forms  are  used,  not  to  indicate  time- 
relation,  but  merely  with  a  view  to  clearness  in  expo- 

1  Ar.  de  Caelo  i.  10, 

2  Plutarch,  ire  pi  ttjs  ev  Ti/xcuc^  \pvxoyovias. 

W.  i 


50  THE    WORLD-PROCESS   OF   THE    TIMAEUS 

sition.  The  cases,  he  says,  are  not  parallel,  for  all  the 
separate  parts  of  a  diagram  can  co-exist,  whereas  dragla 
and  rages,  which  in  the  Timaeus  are  made  to  follow 
one  another,  can  never  co-exist.  Simplicius1,  however, 
replied  that  the  dragia  represents,  not  a  separate  force, 
but  an  ever-present  tendency  which  makes  itself  felt 
even  in  the  midst  of  rages.  There  is,  in  fact,  nothing 
in  the  Timaeus  myth  that  can  be  regarded  as  existing 
in  separation  from  anything  else ;  all  the  solitary  forces 
there  at  work  are  abstractions,  separated  by  sheer 
reason  from  the  environment  of  which  they  are  a  vital 
part,  and  without  which  they  themselves  could  not  exist. 
A  literal  interpretation,  indeed,  would  raise  endless 
difficulties;  the  whole  phraseology  and  arrangement 
seem  to  militate  against  it.  We  are  met  from  the 
beginning  with  conceptions  such  as  ovaia,  ravrov, 
Odrepov,  which  take  us  right  back  to  the  logical 
analysis  of  the  Sophist,  and  which  we  cannot  possibly 
regard  as  material  things.  Again,  the  story  never 
proceeds  uninterruptedly  to  a  conclusion.  Instead  of 
a  narrator  who  sees  clearly  before  his  mind's  eye 
a  definite  series  of  events,  we  have  here,  as  it  were, 
a  photographer,  who  is  continually  presenting  us  with 
the  same  scene  taken  from  different  points  of  view. 
Thus,  in  the  beginning2,  the  body  of  the  universe  is 
presumably  fashioned  out  of  the  four  elements,  whose 
existence  is  pre-supposed ;  later  at  53  B,  however, 
these  elements  themselves  are  represented  as  being 
shaped  by  the  0e6<;  elheai  re  kcl\  aptOfjuols.  Could  this 
possibly  be  part  of  a  story  which  depends  on  time- 
sequence  for  its  intelligibility  ?  Similar  instances  are 
1  Simplicius,  commentary  on  this  passage.  2  31  b. 


THE   WORLD-PROCESS   OF   THE    TIMAEUS  51 

to  be  found  at  29  a  and  30  A,  where  to  yeyovos  and 
to  oparbv  are  introduced  before  any  yeveat^  has  taken 
place,  and  at  34  B  and  c,  where  we  are  told  in 
almost  the  same  breath  that  ^v^t)  is  created  within 
body  (as  if  body  were  prior),  and  also  that  awfjua  is  in 
no  sense  to  be  counted  prior  to  yfrvxt],  Plato  here,  in 
fact,  tells  us  plainly  that  he  does  not  intend  his  words 
to  be  taken  literally.  Finally,  of  course,  there  is  the 
insuperable  difficulty,  emphasised  by  Proclos,  of  ex- 
plaining how  time  can  be  conceived  of  as  being  created 
as  one  of  a  series  of  creations  all  of  which  take  place 
in  time. 

We  may,  then,  I  think,  take  it  for  granted  that  the 
myth  of  the  Timaeus  does  not  profess  to  describe  any 
actual  yevecns  of  the  world  in  time ;  and  we  shall  be 
content  to  interpret  yeveacs  in  the  same  sense  as  Plato 
himself,  at  28  B,  c,  interprets  it :  that  is,  to  irav  is  to 
be  regarded  as  a  yiyvo^evov,  not  because  it  has  in  any 
sense  been  produced  at  any  special  period,  but  because 
it  belongs  to  the  class  of  things,  which,  being  objects 
of  86 £a  and  ataOrjai^,  are  ever  in  flux  and  opposed  to 
that  which  is  truly  6v.  In  this  sense  only  Plato 
affirms  that  6  ovpavo?  yeyovev,  and  the  problem  he  sets 
before  himself  in  the  Timaeus  is  two-fold :  first,  who 
or  what  is  the  air  La  of  this  continual  yeveais,  and 
secondly,  what  is  the  irapaZeiy^a  in  imitation  of  which 
it  is  framed,  what  is  the  eternal  reality  in  virtue  of 
which  alone  it  retains  such  existence  as  it  has  ?  Our 
present  object,  then,  will  be  to  elicit  from  the  poetical 
phraseology  of  the  myth  the  result  of  Plato's  deliberations 
on  these  two  points. 

In  the  beginning  of  his  exposition  Plato  told  us 

4—2 


52  THE   WORLD-PROCESS   OF   THE    TIMAEUS 

that  it  would  be  hard  to  describe  the  atria  of  the 
universe  in  any  hard  and  fast  language.  He  was 
content  for  the  present  simply  to  assume  its  existence 
and  to  call  it  the  hrjfuovpyos,  the  creator  of  all  visible 
things.  As  the  story  proceeds,  however,  it  is  clear  that 
the  air  la  may  be  regarded  in  two  lights :  it  may  be, 
first  of  all,  the  cause  of  motion,  or  of  the  actual  yeveais 
of  phenomena,  and,  secondly,  the  final  cause,  the  ideal 
"  good  "  which  is  the  end  and  aim  of  this  yeveais.  The 
former  aspect  is  unfolded  in  those  passages 1  which  re- 
present the  SrjfMovpyos  as  the  actual  cause  of  becoming, 
and  the  communicator  of  motion  to  the  bodily  universe. 
The  atria  as  final  cause  is  depicted  chiefly  in  the  de- 
scriptions2 of  the  yeveais  of  soul,  where  the  Srjfjiiovpyd^ 
is  actuated  by  a  beneficent  purpose,  and  is  practically 
identical  with  the  idea  of  good,  and  especially  at  41  A, 
where  he  supplies  the  soul-principle  for  the  inferior 
animals,  but  declines  to  have  any  share  in  the  creation 
of  their  bodies,  or  of  the  evil  which  they  must  necessarily 
encounter.  The  atria  here  is  obviously  no  movent 
cause,  but,  to  quote  Plato's  own  words,  rwv  vorjroov  del 
re  ovrtov  apiarov,  the  highest  of  ideal  existences.  He  is 
voijaei  fxera  \6yov  7repi\rj7rrbv3  and  /nerd  vov  Karafyaves* 
He  is,  in  short,  to  be  identified  with  the  supreme 
irapdheiyfxa  itself. 

In  his  character  as  the  originator  of  motion  the 
Srjfjiiovpycx;  of  the  Timaeus  would  appear  to  be  scarcely 
different  from  the  t|tu%j)  rov  koct/jiov,  which  is  consistently 
represented  as  having  the  cause  of  motion  in  herself 
(36  e),  and  as  being  the  primary  cause  of  motion  in  all 
other  things  (46  e).     Plato  is  still  true  to  his  belief  of 

1  28  c  ;  34  a.  2  29  e  ;  37  a.  3  28  a. 


THE    WORLD-PROCESS    OF   THE    TIMAEUS  53 

the  Phaedo,  and  more  elaborate  declaration  in  the 
Philebus,  that  a  divine  vov$,  an  all-governing  reason,  is 
the  cause  of  all  that  is  phenomenal.  In  words  that 
remind  one  most  strongly  of  the  Phaedo  he  affirms  that 
there  are  two  kinds  of  causes,  primary  and  secondary, 
and  whereas  the  latter  embraces  all  manner  of  physical 
processes,  which  most  men  regard  as  true  causes,  the 
former  sort  is  invisible,  the  direct  activity  of  mind 
and  soul;  and  he  that  loves  reason  and  knowledge 
must  seek  the  rational  cause  first,  and  the  secondary 
causes  which  transmit,  but  do  not  create  motion,  only 
for  the  sake  of  the  primary.  We  understand,  therefore, 
that  mind  and  soul  are  the  cause  of  the  activity  of  the 
universe  no  less  than  of  human  action  and  production ; 
we  must  postulate  a  universal  mind  and  soul  to  govern 
the  infinite  movement  of  the  world.  Everything  that 
Plato  regards  as  necessary  for  the  completion  of  the 
universe  is  summed  up  at  47  E  as  ra  Sea  vov  heh-qixtovp- 
<yr)fi€va. 

This  view  not  only  endorses  the  statement  of  the 
Philebus  already  referred  to,  but  is  re-affirmed  by  the 
well-known  passage  in  the  Laws,  in  which  ^rvx7l  l>  the 
avTOKivrjTos,  is  represented  as  the  source  of  all  the 
yeveens  of  the  world.  It  has  in  itself  the  power  of 
moving,  not  only  itself,  but  other  things  as  well ;  all  its 
primary  motions  of  fiovXTjais,  fiovXevais,  Soga,  and  the 
like,  are  reflected  in  the  corporeal  movements  to  which 
they  give  rise.  In  the  6elov  yevo?  of  the  stars  "^v^r)  as 
dpxh  KLvtjaeays  is  seen  in  its  greatest  perfection,  for  in 
them  vov?  is  least  subject  to  the  seductions  of  sense, 
and  their  physical  motions  betoken  the  supreme  regu- 
1  Laws  896  d,  e.     Cf.  Phaedrus  245  c. 


o4  THE    WORLD-PROCESS   OF   THE    TIMAEUS 

larity  and  precision  of  the  soul-movements  which  they 
reflect. 

There  remains  the  larger  question  of  the  atria  as 
the  final  cause  of  the  universe.     Having  satisfied  our- 
selves that  the  movent  cause  is  to  be  found  in  a  universal 
yfrvxVi  we  have  still  to  seek  its  Trapahetyixa,  the  idea 
or  end  for  which  it  came  into  being.     But  before  we 
undertake  this  new  quest,  it  would  be  as  well  to  have 
in  mind  the  main  features  of  this  universe  as  Plato 
has    sketched   it1.     It   is   a   single,   all-comprehensive 
animal,  possessed  of  vov<s  and  yfrvxv  as  well  as  body, 
and  containing   all   visible    creatures   that   exist.     Its 
body  comprehends   all  fire,  air,  water  and  earth2,   so 
that  nothing  is  left  behind  with  which  another  aclofia 
might    be    formed.     It    is    o\ov    ig    oXcov    airdvrcov, 
possessing  no  organs  of  sense,  and  therefore  destitute  of 
sensations  except  in  so  far  as  it  may  be  said  to  have 
them  through  its  various  parts.     Its  shape  is  spherical, 
for  the  animal  that  contains  within  itself  all  possible 
animals  should  surely  have   that  form  which  may  be 
filled  with  all  possible  shapes,  and  its  only  motion  is 
a  revolution  upon  its  own  axis — that  physical  motion 
which  approaches  nearest  to  the  pure  activity  of  mind3. 
As  regards  its  soul,  one   cannot  be   far  wrong  in 
ascribing  to  it,  though  in  purer  and  more  perfect  pro- 
portions, a  structure  similar  to  that  which  one  perceives 
in  the  -^v^ai  of  individual  men.    Wvxv  is  a  compound, 
formed    of    the    ovaia   which    is    afxepiarQ^    and    ever 
changeless,    and   the    ovaia  which    is    ytyvofjievov    and 
divided  in  visible  bodies,  mingled  with  a  third  ingre- 
dient, Essence,  which,  like  them,  is  a  mixture  of  two 

1  30  b.  2  32  d  seq.  3  Cf.  Laivs  898  a. 


THE   WORLD-PROCESS   OF   THE    T1MAEUS  55 

things,  ravrbv  and  Odrepov,  and  which,  together  with 
these  last,  corresponds  to  one  of  the  leading  categories 
of  the  Sophist,  which  are  employed  by  the  human  mind 
whenever  she  passes  judgment  on,  or  attains  to  know- 
ledge of,  anything  whatsoever.  A  question  arises  here 
as  to  Plato's  exact  meaning  in  saying  that  yjrv^r)  is  a  com- 
pound of  this  sort,  and  that  the  changeless  and  changing 
world,  together  with  Essence,  are  composed  of  these  two 
ingredients,  ravrbv  and  Odrepov.  The  answer  is  surely 
to  be  found  at  37  A,  B.  There  we  find  it  clearly  stated 
that  yjrv)(r},  whenever  she  comes  in  contact  with  any- 
thing, whether  it  belongs  to  the  class  of  the  d/juepcarov, 
or  that  of  the  fiepiarov,  being  affected  in  her  entire  sub- 
stance, tells  that  wherewith  the  thing  is  same,  and  that 
wherefrom  it  is  different.  Hence  we  understand  that 
the  function  of  yfrvxv>  whether  it  be  that  of  cosmos  or 
individual,  is  to  declare  the  relation  of  Same  and  Other 
in  regard  to  everything  that  comes  under  her  operation, 
whether  it  belong  to  the  permanent  and  intelligible 
sphere,  or  that  of  the  sensible  and  ever-changing. 
^v%rj  thus  has  the  intelligible  and  sensible  as  ingre- 
dients because  she  deals  with  both  alike,  and  these  are 
mingled  with  Essence,  i.e.,  with  Same  and  Other,  inas- 
much as  these  last  are  the  leading  predicates  which  she 
necessarily  employs  in  all  her  functioning.  The  whole 
realm  of  ideas,  moreover,  and  the  sensible  world  of  flux 
likewise,  are  composed  of  Same  and  Other,  inasmuch  as 
the  mind  is  eternally  decomposing  them,  different  though 
they  be  in  kind,  into  these  same  two  elements.  In 
fact,  all  existent  things,  so  far  as  they  are  known, 
may  be  said  to  consist  of  these  ingredients. 

This  doctrine  is  not  one  that  need  surprise  us  here ; 


56  THE   WORLD-PROCESS   OF   THE    TIMAEUS 

it  was  stated  before  in  a  less  explicit  form  in  the 
Sophist1.  There,  it  will  be  remembered,  the  knowing 
subject  is  said  to  have  Koii'fovia  with  to  yiyvofievov  by 
means  of  ataBrjat^,  and  with  to  ovtms  ov  by  means  of 
yjrv^j,  bid  Xoyta/jiov ;  here  we  have  the  theory  of  tyvxn 
as  a  compound  of  the  intelligible  and  the  sensible.  Also 
the  categories  ovaia,  tclvtov,  Odrepov  and  the  like,  are 
found  to  have  kolvoovlcl  with  one  another  in  virtue  of 
their  inherence  in  the  same  thing  when  analysed  by 
the  same  mind.  Putting  these  two  statements  to- 
gether, we  arrive  at  the  doctrine  of  the  Timaeus.  The 
knowing  subject,  or,  to  borrow  the  language  of  the 
Timaeus,  the  soul,  in  virtue  of  her  /cotvcovla  with 
the  objects  both  of  €irtaT7]fjL7]  and  atadrjat^,  imparts 
to  both  the  attributes  Same,  Other  and  the  like, 
which  are  the  universal  predicates  indispensable  to 
her  activity,  so  that  they  may  be  said  to  consist  of 
these  attributes.  Hence  the  categories  too,  being 
found  in  the  same  objects,  have  koivcdvlcl  with  one 
another;  and — a  fact  which  is  more  important  in  the 
light  of  one  of  the  duoplai  of  the  Parmenides — the 
ideal  world  itself,  consisting,  in  virtue  of  the  Koivwvia 
of  ^vyj),  of  tclvtov,  Odrepov  and  the  rest,  is  capable  of 
receiving  contrary  attributes  no  less  than  the  pheno- 
menal :  this,  however,  is  no  longer  due  to  the  /cotvcovia 
of  incompatible  ideal  entities,  but  to  the  necessary 
functioning  of  the  mind,  which,  by  participating  in  its 
object,  makes  the  object  participate  in  all  manner  of 
contradictory  categories.  Ideal  and  material  worlds, 
then,  so  far  as  they  are  known,  may  be  said  to  consist  of 
Same  and  Other. 

1  Sophist  248  a. 


THE    WORLD-PROCESS    OF   THE    TIMAEUS  57 

But  ^frvxVy  besides  possessing  Same  and  Other,  and 
thereby  Essence,  as  primary  ingredients  of  her  nature, 
has  in  addition  the  two  motions,  Same  and  Other, 
which  apply  respectively  to  the  faculties  of  reason  and 
sensation,  inasmuch  as  reason  is  concerned  with  that 
which  is  Kara  ravrd  e%oi>,  sensation  with  that  which  is 
continually  Odrepov,  ytyvo/mevov  zeal  diroWvfjievov  (28  A). 
They  are  made  to  revolve  after  the  fashion  of  the 
spheres  of  the  fixed  stars  and  planets,  simply  because 
Plato  regards  all  physical  motions  as  the  counterpart  of 
the  noetic  activity  of  vovs.  Each  of  these  circles,  further, 
consists  itself  of  Same  and  Other,  for  they  are  the 
essential  modes  of  all  activities  of  soul.  Here  we  are 
in  a  position  to  realise  even  more  perfectly  why  Plato 
should  from  the  outset  make  the  afxepcarov,  which  is 
votjtov,  and  the  fjueptarov,  which  is  the  object  of 
sensation,  ingredients  in  the  formation  of  soul ;  soul 
partakes  of  the  nature  of  both  of  these  in  virtue  of  her 
apprehension  of  both.  One  is  reminded  of  the  defini- 
tion of  ovaia  which  was  introduced  in  the  Sophist  to 
satisfy  Idealists  and  Materialists  at  once — fj  hvvafjLis 
rov  iroielv  rj  irdayeiv.  Applied  by  the  idealists,  this 
definition  included  both  ovaia  and  tyvx/j ;  applied  by 
the  materialists,  it  included  both  to  alo-Orjrov  and  to 
alaOavofjbevov.  Hence  ^f%^,  in  any  case,  was  to  be 
counted  ovaia,  inasmuch  as  it  operated  in  both  spheres. 
Plato,  therefore,  is  still  maintaining  his  compromise 
between  materialism  and  idealism.  Aware  of  the 
merits  on  both  sides,  he  will  not  reject  either  utterly, 
and  his  conception  of  soul  as  the  comprehensive  essence, 
through  which  ideas  and  phenomena  alike  are  appre- 
hended, and  as  the  eternal  cause  to  which  phenomena 


58  THE   WORLD-PROCESS   OF   THE    TIMAEUS 

owe  their  being,  preserves  the  sovereignty  of  the  ideal 
world,  while  accounting  for  the  apparent  reality  of 
material  things. 

Besides  functioning  as  reason  and  sensation  and 
operating  through  Same  and  Other,  the  soul  is  repre- 
sented as  being  composed  of  mathematical  ratios, 
corresponding  to  the  intervals  of  the  diatonic  scale. 
This  of  course  signifies  simply  that  the  apprehension  of 
harmony,  too,  is  one  of  the  striking  modes  of  its 
operation.  Soul,  then,  is  Hot  itself  a  harmony,  as 
Simmias  tried  to  hold  in  the  Phaedo,  but  it  has 
within  it  the  power  of  grasping  and  understanding 
musical  relations  in  virtue  of  number  and  proportion, 
which  are  indispensable  modes  of  its  activity. 

In  his  account  of  ^rvxh  Plato  has  been  enabled  to 
lay  down  certain  definite  principles  and  to  come  to 
some  definite  conclusions.  Concerning  the  body  of  the 
cosmos  and  its  component  parts,  however,  he  cannot 
attain  to  certitude  in  any  degree.  It  is  ordained  that 
everything  which  is  visible  shall  be  in  eternal  flux ; 
consequently  everything  that  goes  to  make  up  the 
materia]  universe  is  subject  to  incessant  variation  of 
form.  Not  only  do  organisms  suffer  daily  change 
within  themselves,  but  they  themselves  in  their 
entirety  are  forever  passing  away  and  being  replaced 
by  others,  with  the  exception  indeed  of  the  stars,  the 
heavenly  bodies,  who  stand  highest  in  the  realm  of 
creation,  and  in  a  peculiar  way  represent  the  universe 
itself,  for  they  are  its  leading  constituents,  and  from 
them  is  derived  the  substance  of  the  smaller  constituents. 
This,  I  think,  is  all  that  is  meant  by  the  creation  by  the 
0€ol   0€cov  of  mortal  bodies.     The  individual  souls  of 


THE    WORLD-PROCESS    OF   THE    TIMAEUS  59 

men,  animals,  and  all  lower  existences,  receive  their 
bodily  form  from  the  planets,  who  are  the  firstborn  of 
the  #eo9,  or  rather,  the  highest  phenomenal  existences 
in  the   universe.     The  fixed  stars  have  already  been 
called  into  requisition  to  act  as  the  6xv/jLaTa  °f  the 
souls   while    they    listen    to    the    Artificer's    harangue 
regarding  the  laws  of  the  universe;  and  just  as  this 
detail  has  a  metaphorical  significance  merely,  so  the 
creative  function  of  the  planets  means  simply  that  all 
lower  creatures  derive  then*  substance  from  the  heavenly 
bodies.     Plato's  language  seems  to  me  to  admit  of  no 
other  interpretation.     The   Brjfjbcovpyo^  himself  is   the 
cause  of  the  creation  and  differentiation  of  the  souls ; 
what  the  Oeol  do  is  simply  to  provide  material  for  the 
bodies,    to    nourish    the    bodies    when    made,    and    to 
receive  them  again  at  death.     Nothing  can  be  gained 
by  attempting  to  extract  an  unnecessary  complexity  in 
Plato's  metaphysics  from  the  picturesque  scene  in  which 
the  Srj/jiiovpyos,  calling  together  the  6eol  6ewv,  entrusts 
to  them  the  making  of  the  bodies  of  inferior  creatures. 
But,  to  resume  our  account  of  the  flux,  part  of  the  law 
of  change  is  that  the  inferior  souls,  which  are  parts  of 
the  great  soul,  take  upon  them  the  nature  of  man,  and 
thereafter    that    of    woman    and    the    lower   animals, 
according  to  the  merit  or  demerit  of  their  successive 
lives.     The    possession   of  body   and   sensation   is   an 
unceasing  source   of  temptation,  and  when  a  man  is 
mastered   by   the    lower   impulses    of   his   soul,    it    is 
ordained  that  his  soul  shall  pass  first  into  the  body  of 
a  woman,  and,  if  even  then  he  fails  to  repent  of  the 
error  of  his  way,  into  the  form  of  some  beast  suited 
to  his  particular  nature.     Only  through  following  the 


60  THE    WORLD-PROCESS    OF   THE    TIMAEUS 

dictates  of  reason  can  he  hope  to  escape,  and  rising 
beyond  the  trammels  of  the  body,  return  to  his  first 
and  best  estate  (rrplv  ttj  tclvtov  /cal  opboiov  irepcoSo)  rfj 
iv  avroj  ^vveTTiaTrofievo^  top  ito\vv  o^Xov  /cal  varepov 
irpoa^vvra  i/c  Trvpos  /cal  vSaros  /cal  depos  /cal  7*79, 
@opv/3(o8r]  /cat  aXoyov  ovra,  Xoya)  /cpaTr}aa<$  e/9  to  rrjs 
irpooTTj's  ical  dpicrTTis  ac^i/coLTo  elSo?  e£eo)9.   42  D). 

We  have  now  reached  a  point  where  we  may  pause 

to   consider   the    nature    of   the    idea    or   7rapaB6Lyfia} 

which,  Plato  says,  the  Srj/juovpyds  had  in  view  in  the 

production  of  a  universe   such  as  we  have  described- 

That  universe,  fair  though  it  be,  is  not  calculated  to 

inspire  the  philosopher  with  satisfaction,  for  it  is  fated 

to    undergo    incessant   change,   and    the  inferior  souls 

within  it,  by  reason  of  their  connexion  with  body,  are 

ever  subject    to    misfortune.     The    world    of  sense    is 

unreal  (28  a)  :  it  is  an  eternal   illusion :   it   has  in  it 

nothing  akin  to  reason  or  thought  (46  d)  :  it  only  exists 

in  so  far  as  it  is  seen  or  handled  (31  b).     Hence  only 

when  a  man's  soul  is  free  from  sin,  and  thereby  casts 

off  the  incubus  of  body,  will  the  illusion  of  sense  cease 

to  have  a  meaning  for  him1;  then  his  reason  will  work 

in  harmony  with  that  of  the  All.     How  then  are  we  to 

describe  the  ideal  permanency  to  which  the  Brj/uLovpyos 

looked  beyond  all  the  flux  of  sense?  It  is  to  twv  voov/xe- 

vcov  koWkjtov  /cal  /caTa  iravra  Tekeov2.     But  it  is  before 

all  else  a  £doov,  an  eternal  and  perfect  animal,  which 

contains  within  itself  all   other  vorjTa   fwa    that    are. 

Now  a  %S)ov,  as  Plato  indicates  time  and  again,  is  a 

complex    being   possessing   faculties    both    bodily   and 

mental ;  but  if  a  %wov  is  to  be  votjtov  merely,  if  it  is  to 

1  42  d.  2  30  d. 


THE   WORLD-PROCESS   OF   THE    TIM  A  E  US  61 

be  placed  in  the  category  of  the  changeless  and  eternal, 
it  must  assuredly,  on  Platonic  principles,  divest  itself  of 
everything  that  is  perceptible,  of  all  those  attributes 
which  cling  to  it  in  virtue  of  its  bodily  nature.  As  a 
result  of  this  process  it  becomes  not  even  ^rvxv  (since 
y{rvxv,  too,  in  this  dialogue,  is  concerned  in  part  with 
bodily  functions),  but  vovs  pure  and  simple.  As  the 
Kebes  of  the  Phaedo  puts  it :  o\<p  teal  iravrl  o/jLocorepov 
earl  tyvxh  T(P  ^€i  gmtclvtcos  eyovTt  /uaWov  rj  tco  fir)1. 

The  supreme  irapdhei'yixa  of  the  universe,  then,  being 
a  %ooov  and  a  votjtov  t^wov,  is  vovs,  a  perfect  universal 
vovs;  and  the  ideas  of  the  subordinate  creatures  are 
only  fiopia  /caO"  ev  real  Kara  yevrj  of  the  avro  o 
€<tti  %ooov2.  At  39  E  Plato  says:  "As  many  kinds  as 
mind  perceives  to  exist  in  the  avro  £ooov,  so  many  did 
the  Srj/jLiovpyos  think  fit  that  the  visible  world  should 
contain,  and  of  these  there  are  in  the  main  four  kinds, 
first,  the  heavenly  deities,  and  after  them  the  tribes 
that  inhabit  the  air,  the  water,  and  the  earth."  This 
statement  translated  into  ordinary  language  means 
that  only  the  animal  creation,  the  various  tribes  that 
inhabit  the  four  elements,  merit  ideal  counterparts  and 
a  share  in  the  avro  £gW,  the  consummation  of  all 
existence.  Now  this  restriction  of  ideas  to  the  various 
species  of  animals  carries  our  thoughts  at  once  to  the 
transmigration  theory,  and  the  fact  that  within  all 
these  tribes,  from  man  downwards,  there  is  a  constant 
struggle  between  higher  and  lower  impulses,  with  the 
result  that  the  individual  soul  is  continually  being 
reincarnated  in  a  higher  or  a  lower  form.  The  animals 
for  whom  ideas  are  reserved  are  exactly  those  who  come 
1  Phaedo  79  e.  2  30  c. 


1)2  THE   WORLD-PROCESS   OF   THE    TIMAEU& 

within  the  range  of  transmigration,  the  tribes  of  air, 
earth    and    sea,    each    of    which,    according    to    Plato, 
represents    the    souls    of    mortal    men    which     have 
degenerated  through   the  taint  of  sin.     It  is  true,  of 
course,  that  the  heavenly  deities,  who  are  immeasur- 
ably   removed    from    human   frailty  and    the   need    of 
transmigration  alike,  are  also  mentioned ;  but  Plato  has 
so  often  emphasised  their  pre-eminence,  and  their  close 
connexion  with  the  All  itself,  that  one  is  not  surprised 
to  find   them   at   the   head   of  the   ideas   here.     They 
assuredly    will    have    their    counterpart    in    the    ideal 
sphere,  for  they  of  all   material   things  are  the  most 
perfect   imitators    of  Reason.     The    members    of    the 
vegetable  kingdom,  on  the  other  hand,  which  at  first 
sight  would   not  seem   to    enter  into  the    scheme    of 
transmigration,  have  no  place  in  the  list  of  ideas  as 
here  given.     Plato,  however,  acknowledged  them  to  be 
feoa  of  a  kind,  and  he  must  inevitably  in  drawing  up  a 
complete  list  of  ideas  have  included  them  both  in  his 
system   of  transmigration  and  of  ideas.     Empedocles, 
his  predecessor  in  the  transmigration-doctrine,  not  only 
made  plants  participate  in  the  process  of  metempsychosis, 
but  affirmed  that  he  himself  had  been  a  ddfjuvos. 

It  would  appear,  therefore,  that  the  scheme  of  ideas 
as  here  propounded  has  its  basis  in  ethics.  The  tribes  of 
the  air,  earth,  and  sea  are  assigned  a  share  in  the  avro 
%(bov  because  they  are  degenerate  forms  of  the  im- 
mortal principle  of  soul,  which  when  it  is  conceived 
as  functioning  in  perfect  purity  and  unity,  like  the 
d\r]0ivd<;  /cat  Oelos  vom  of  Philebus  22  c,  is  the  ideal 
%(hov  itself.  It  is  only  the  body,  and  the  sensations 
and  lusts  that  attend  upon  it,  that  keep  the  individual 


THE   WORLD-PROCESS   OF   THE    TIMAEUS  63 

^rvxh  from  functioning  in  harmony  with  that  of  the 
All ;  they  inflict  upon  it  harder  and  harder  penalties 
in  proportion  to  its  weakness,  and  prevent  the  reali- 
sation of  that  ideal  universe,  an  all-embracing  mind, 
working  in  unison  with  itself  as  one  whole,  perfect  and 
undivided.  The  beasts  of  the  field,  then,  the  fowls  of 
the  air,  and  the  fish  of  the  sea,  have  each  in  their  kind 
a  share  in  the  ideal  ^ov,  for  they  represent  a  portion 
of  the  universal  soul,  which  is  ever  constant,  though 
subject  to  the  adverse  power  of  sin :  and  the  eternal 
prototype  of  each  is  simply  a  specific  or  generic  deter- 
mination, as  the  case  may  be,  of  the  universal  vovs,  which 
is  the  supreme  idea  and  irapaSeiy/jia,  the  ultimate  goal 
of  all  human  endeavour.  In  other  words,  Plato  here 
indicates  that  the  ideas,  which  have  for  so  long  been 
the  cardinal  principle  of  his  ontology,  are  in  the  last 
analysis  special  modes  of  regarding  a  universal  vovs, 
for  the  realisation  of  which  every  soul,  albeit  uncon- 
sciously, strives,  the  final  end  and  purpose  of  that 
everlasting  process  of  which  the  world-soul  is  the  cause 
— the  world-soul  itself  conceived  in  its  highest  phase 
and  measured  by  its  highest  achievement.  Thus  the 
idea  of  star  is  simply  one  aspect  of  the  universal  vovs, 
which  must  be  considered  as  providing  the  type  for 
the  soul-activity  of  the  stars,  and  of  every  soul  through- 
out the  whole  range  of  living  genera  and  species,  and 
also,  secondarily  and  indirectly,  as  being  the  cause  of 
everything  that  is  icakbv  in  the  visible  world.  Even 
in  the  Sophist  Plato  repudiated  the  thought  that  to 
TravTeXws  ov1  could  be  devoid  of  £corj;  and  these 
€L$r]   are    confined   to    £ooa  alone.      No    room    for   in- 

1  Sophist  249  a. 


64  THE    WORLD-PROCESS   OF   THE    T1MAEUS 

animate  objects  can  possibly  be  made  in  the  four- 
fold classification  of  40  A  without  forcing  the  language 
beyond  measure.  The  position  which  Plato  assigns  to 
inanimate  substances,  such  as  the  four  elements,  and 
the  nature  of  the  ideas  of  these,  will  be  defined  when 
we  come  to  our  examination  of  the  physical  portion  of 
the  Timaeus. 

Priority  in  time  in  the  myth  stands,  as  we  have 
shown  above,  for  priority  in  ideal  importance,  and 
when  Plato  speaks  of  a  man,  after  many  transmigrations 
and  much  conflict  with  bodily  passion,  attaining  to  his 
first  and  best  nature,  we  may  be  sure  that  the  first  and 
best  nature  is  that  which  is  ideally  and  eternally  first, 
though  not  in  time.  Hence  the  journey  by  which  the 
soul  is  freed  from  bodily  hindrance,  and  learns  to 
function  in  harmony  with  the  great  soul  of  the  uni- 
verse, is  not  strictly  a  "  return  "  in  time,  but  the  much- 
wished-for  and  well-nigh  unrealisable  ideal  of  the 
philosopher.  If  every  soul  were  to  attain  to  its  first 
estate,  then  the  supreme  idea  would  be  perfectly 
represented  in  time,  and  Plato  is  not  without  hope 
that  some  souls  at  least  may  pass  beyond  the  reach  of 
bodily  hindrance  and  evil 1.  The  soul  of  him  who  is  free 
from  bodily  ills  will  be  given  a  place  on  its  kindred 
star  and  learn  the  nature  of  the  universe  as  it  truly  is, 
like  the  souls  of  those  who,  in  the  Phaedrus,  viewed 
the  ideas  in  the  supracelestial  region.  For  Plato's 
deos  is  not  a  God,  who  literally  creates,  in  the 
beginning,  a  universe  that  is  altogether  fair  and  good, 
and  souls  whom  no  spot  of  imperfection  has  yet 
touched;  it  is  the  eternal  idea,  for  which  the  whole 
1  42  c,  d  ;  44  c  ;  90  d. 


THE   WORLD-PROCESS   OF    THE    TIMAEUS  65 

creation  yearns,  and  strives  through  many  imperfections 
to  reach,  and  towards  which  every  achievement  of  the 
intellect,  every  victory  gained  by  soul  over  body,  is  an 
advance. 

To  sum  up  the  metaphysical  significance  of  the 
world-process  which  we  have  been  reviewing,  Plato 
seems  in  the  first  portion  of  the  Timaeus  to  have 
enunciated  in  a  poetical  form  the  leading  features  of 
his  latest  view  of  the  universe.  From  the  first  he  felt 
sure  that  there  was  some  permanent  principle  or 
principles  underlying  variable  phenomena.  He  has 
made  diligent  search  for  it,  and,  as  his  declarations 
in  the  Phaedo,  Philebus,  and  Sophist  would  lead  us  to 
expect,  he  has  found  it  in  soul  and  mind.  Reason  is 
the  highest  and  best  thing  of  which  the  human  being 
has  experience,  hence  to  nothing  less  than  reason  can 
he  attribute  the  perfection  and  ultimate  reality  of 
everything  he  sees.  Even  physical  motion  is  but  the 
material  counterpart  of  noetic  activity ;  and  time,  which 
measures  all  physical  motion  and  change,  is  but  the 
image  of  eternity,  throughout  which  the  activity  of 
supreme  z/ou?  endures. 

And  Reason  has  two  aspects ;  it  is  both  atria  and 
rrapdhetyfjia,  of  which  the  latter  is  prior  in  logical  and 
ideal  importance.  The  source  of  existence  is  in  its 
highest  phase  the  source  of  good,  as  the  teaching  of 
the  Republic  leads  us  to  expect.  To  the  universal  soul 
man  owes  his  very  existence,  and  he  must  forever  seek 
and  emulate  it  in  its  divine  and  ideal  form,  if  he  is 
to  gain  a  happy  life.  When  every  soul  in  the  universe 
has  become  attuned  to  the  harmony  of  the  universal 
z/ou?,  and  has  cast  off  all  that  burden  of  earth  and  fire 

w.  5 


66  THE   WORLD-PROCESS   OF   THE    TIMAEUS 

and  water,  which  clung  to  it  in  virtue  of  the  faculties 
of  sense,  then,  and  not  till  then,  will  come  the  perfect 
representation  in  time  of  the  supreme  idea  of  the  uni- 
verse, and  the  various  ideas  of  animal  life  of  which  it  is 
composed.  And,  if  ever  the  individual  intellect  is  thus 
exalted,  it  shall  know  and  realise  for  the  first  time  true 
beauty  and  justice  and  knowledge,  that  aspect  of  the 
ideal  world  that  impressed  itself  first  on  Plato's  mind1. 
Those  eternal  essences,  which  were  the  load-star  of  his 
early  ambitions,  have  now  found  a  resting-place  worthy 
of  their  exalted  rank.  We  saw  that  one  of  the  chief 
results  of  the  Parmenides  was  the  conviction  that  the 
ideas  and  the  supreme  idea,  if  they  are  to  be  not  merely 
existent,  but  objects  of  knowledge,  must  have  real  and 
lasting  connexion  with  one  another  as  well  as  with  the 
flux  of  sense.  Here,  then,  in  the  Timaeus,  we  find 
this  condition  fulfilled ;  the  ideas  stand  to  the  supreme 
idea  in  the  most  intimate  of  relations:  they  are  aspects 
of  the  perfect  and  all-sufficient  vovs,  which  is  brought 
into  vital  contact  with  the  souls  of  all  the  generic  and 
specific  forms  of  life. 

Finally,  may  we  not  say  that  Plato  has  in  this 
dialogue  amply  satisfied  the  criteria  furnished  by  the 
criticism  of  the  Parmenides  and  Sophist  ?  The  supreme 
eV,  if  it  is  to  be  known,  must  exist  not  in  self-identity 
merely,  but  in  relation  to  the  many  too.  Further,  in 
the  Sophist  it  was  found  that  it  must  possess  Kivr^at^, 
Zoorj,  vovs  and  yjrvxv-  We  are  now  assured  that  the 
Oecos  j'ovs  is  the  supreme  eV,  that  it  has  life  and 
activity,  and  that  only  in  so  far  as  they  imitate  it 
successfully  can  the  individual  souls  be  said  to  possess 
reality  at  all. 

1  Cf.  Phaedo  114  c. 


ESSAY  IV. 

THE  IDEAS  AS  'AptdfioL 

The  portion  of  the  Timaeus  with  which  we  must 
now  deal  forms  a  contrast  in  many  respects  to  the 
former  half,  which  we  have  just  left.  The  object  of  the 
earlier  chapters  was  not  so  much  to  describe  to  us  the 
cosmos  in  its  material  aspect,  as  to  unveil  to  us  its  ideal 
prototype,  and  to  take  us  to  the  very  source  of  all  its 
activities,  to  discover  to  us  a  universal  and  eternal  vovs, 
which  manifests  itself  in  the  cosmos  just  as  surely  as  our 
minds  find  expression  in  our  bodies,  and  which,  when 
conceived  of  as  functioning  in  unrestrained  perfection, 
is  the  ethical  ideal  in  imitation  of  which  the  world,  with 
all  the  creatures  contained  therein,  was  created.  From 
47  E  onwards,  however,  Plato  addresses  himself  to  the 
task  of  examining  the  material  universe  itself,  in  the 
hope  of  laying  down,  if  possible,  certain  definite 
principles,  which  may  be  said  to  govern  the  operations 
of  the  universal  soul  in  the  visible  world.  Having  given 
dogmatic  utterance  to  his  conviction  that  vovs  and 
yfrvxv  ai*e  the  ultimate  cause  of  all  phenomenal  things, 
he  now  endeavours  to  support  it  by  a  minute  examina- 
tion of  phenomena.    His  attitude,  therefore,  has  changed ; 

5—2 


6$  THE    IDEAS    AS   'Aptd/JLOL 

all  his  attention  is  now  directed  towards  the  material 
universe  itself,  in  order  that  he  may  find  therein  the 
proof  of  the  belief  that  he  has  just  proclaimed.  This  is, 
indeed,  the  only  course  open  to  him ;  it  is  inevitable 
that  he  should  begin  with  the  world  of  time  and  space, 
in  which  he  finds  himself.  It  is  only  through  using 
material  objects  as  images  that  we  may  hope  to  assume 
the  existence  of  the  ideas,  which  are  the  goal  of  all 
knowledge.  If  we  would  try  from  the  outset  to  look 
straight  at  the  sun,  we  should  only  make  for  ourselves 
darkness  through  excess  of  light. 

Plato,  accordingly,  begins  this  second  part  of  the 
dialogue  by  declaring  his  intention  of  retracing  his 
steps  in  order  to  set  forth  the  nature  of  dvay/crj  and  the 
irXavcofjievT]  ah  la,  which  share  with  vovs  the  responsi- 
bility for  the  material  order  of  things.  In  particular, 
he  is  desirous  of  enquiring  into  the  nature  of  air,  earth, 
fire,  and  water,  whose  existence  was  assumed  from  the 
first  as  being  essential  to  the  materiality  of  the  universe, 
but  of  which  no  explanation  has  yet  been  given.  This 
new  method  and  point  of  view  necessitate  a  fresh 
classification  of  existence,  based  upon  a  different  principle 
of  division.  Instead  of  having  two  classes,  the  vot\tqv 
and  the  oparbv,  the  irapaheiyfia  and  the  fxifjurifjia,  we 
now  have  three,  viz.,  the  vo^tov,  the  oparov,  and  the 
vTroho^rj  yeveaeco?,  an  elbos  which  is  ^aXeirov  and 
d/jivSpov.  To  define  this  latter,  the  Substrate  of 
Becoming,  is  an  extremely  difficult  task.  Its  nature  can 
scarcely  be  expressed  in  positive  language ;  in  fact,  it 
cannot  be  described  at  all  without  calling  to  our  aid  the 
phenomena  of  which  it  is  the  receptacle.  Now  we  see 
that  fire,  water,  and  all  substances  that  are  possessed  of 


THE   IDEAS   AS    'ApudfJioi  69 

sensible  qualities,  are  forever  in  a  process  of  trans- 
mutation ;  water  is  continually  changing  into  earth  or 
air,  and  air  in  turn  becomes  fire  ;  the  flux  is  ceaseless, 
and  it  is  impossible  to  call  any  of  these  bodies  by  any 
definite  term,  since  one  is  never  sure  that  it  has  not 
already  become  different.  But  one  may  conceive  of 
something  in  which  all  these  varying  phenomena  arise, 
and  to  which,  in  virtue  of  its  permanence,  a  name  may 
safely  be  assigned.  In  order  to  understand  the  nature 
of  this  receptacle  we  may  take  the  illustration  of  gold, 
which  in  the  hands  of  the  craftsman  takes  upon  itself 
in  turn  all  manner  of  forms  and  shapes,  but  which  in 
strictness  can  be  termed  gold  and  nothing  else.  In  like 
manner  the  virohoxv  receives  within  itself  all  material 
bodies,  and  puts  on  all  manner  of  varying  appearances, 
while  it  is  itself  utterly  devoid  of  body  or  form.  This 
is  its  sole  function,  and  it  is  eternally  true  to  that 
function.  The  ever-varying  bodies  that  enter  into  it 
are  likenesses  of  eternal  existences,  copied  from  them  in 
a  strange  and  mysterious  fashion  which  will  hereafter 
be  explained.  Meantime  we  are  satisfied  that  the 
universe  may  be  said  to  consist  of  three  kinds :  to 
jtyvofjievov,  to  iv  Sjiyv6Tacy  and  to  8'  66ev  atpo/xocovfjievov 
<bv€Tai  to  yiyvofjuevov. 

Here  Plato  pauses  to  answer  a  supposed  objection. 
Are  you  right  in  mentioning  likenesses  and  models  in 
this  connexion  ?  Is  there,  for  example,  such  a  thing  as 
TTvp  icf)'  iavTovy  the  likenesses  of  which  enter  into  the 
v7ro8oxv  ?  And  are  there  ideas  of  all  the  other  bodies 
which  we  have  been  calling  fxi^irjixaTa  tcov  del  ovtcov  ? 
The  answer  is  decisive.  If  vovs  and  Soga  a\7]0rj$  are 
to  be  eternally  distinct,  then  assuredly  there  are  ideas 


70  THE   IDEAS   AS   'ApiOfiOL 

of  this  kind,  entirely  separate  from  the  sensible  objects 
which  Ave  perceive,  avaiaOrjTa  v<$>  tj/jlcov  elS?;,  voovfjueva 
fxovov.  We  therefore  re-affirm  our  classification.  There 
is,  first,  the  invisible  and  immutable  idea,  to  be  grasped 
by  vorjais  alone/ secondly,  its  copy,  which  is  subject  to 
ceaseless  flux,  and  apprehended  by  aiadii<ri$,  and, 
thirdly,  eternal  x^Pa>  the  eSpa  of  all  Becoming,  which 
is  grasped  XoyiafMp  rtvt  vo6(p.  It  is  this  %a>pa,  adds 
Plato,  which  is  always  perverting  our  judgment  when 
we  are  considering  immaterial  things.  Because  a 
material  body,  being  a  perishable  copy,  must  perforce 
arise  in  something,  in  order  to  come  into  existence  at 
all,  we  must  needs  apply  spatial  relations  to  the  ideal 
world  too;  whereas  reason  should  tell  us  that  the  natures 
of  idea  and  copy  are  so  essentially  distinct  that  the 
conditions  of  the  one  are  in  no  wise  applicable  to  the 
other. 

Proceeding  with  his  analysis,  Plato  goes  on  to  say 
that  the  v7ro$oxv>  being  ceaselessly  filled  with  earth,  air, 
fire  and  water,  is  continually  disturbed,  and  is  subject 
to  a  vibratory  motion  due  to  the  diversity  and  inequality 
of  the  bodies  which  enter  into  it.  This  vibration  reacts 
also  upon  the  objects  by  which  it  is  caused,  and  has  the 
effect  of  separating  and  sifting  them,  so  that  similar 
things  are  gradually  drawn  together. 

We  have  now  to  learn  the  explanation  of  the 
generation  of  fire  and  the  other  elements,  which  we 
were  led  to  expect  at  50  c.  In  order  to  make  them  as 
fair  as  possible,  the  creator  from  the  first  shaped  them 
with  forms  and  numbers.  Now,  seeing  that  they  are 
material  bodies,  and  that  material  bodies  require  depth 
and  therefore  surface,  it  is  plain  that  these  elements 


THE   IDEAS   AS   'kptOfiol  71 

have  surface,  of  which  the  simplest  example  is  the 
triangle  ;  and  all  triangles  may  be  resolved  into  two,  the 
rectangular  isosceles  and  the  rectangular  scalene,  which 
we  accordingly  affirm  to  be  the  bases  of  the  elements, 
although  we  acknowledge  that  there  may  be  apyaX  even 
beyond  these,  known  to  God  alone,  and  such  as  are 
friends  of  God.  Our  task  now  is  to  choose  the  figure 
appropriate  to  each  element,  and  to  decide  upon  the 
dpidfiol  or  proportions  in  which  the  constituent  triangles 
are  combined  iolov  Se  etcaarov  avrclov  yeyovev  eZSo? 
fcal  0;  oacov  avfjureaovrcdv  dpcO/idov1).  To  begin  with 
fire,  we  find  that  six  rectangular  scalenes  combine  to 
form  an  equilateral  triangle,  four  of  which  may  be  placed 
together  to  form  the  first  regular  solid,  the  pyramid. 
This  figure  we  conceive  to  be  the  typical  form  of  fire, 
and  we  may  therefore  say  that  fire  is  composed  of  six 
primal  scalenes  combined  together  four  times,  or  a  total 
of  twenty-four  primal  scalenes.  The  form  of  air  is  the 
octahedron,  and  is  made  up  of  six  multiplied  by  eight, 
or  forty-eight  primal  scalenes.  Water,  which  is  repre- 
sented by  the  icosahedron,  is  composed  of  6  x  20,  or 
120,  of  the  same  primal  triangles.  These  three  elements, 
being  all  capable  of  transformation  into  one  another,  are 
accordingly  furnished  with  the  same  base.  Earth,  which 
stands  apart  from  them,  has  as  its  element  the  rectangular 
isosceles,  which,  when  combined  in  six  sets  of  four,  gives 
rise  to  the  cube,  the  eZSo?  of  earth.  Earth,  then,  is 
formed  of  4x6,  or  24,  of  the  rectangular  isosceles 
triangles. 

This   apportioning    of    the    regular   solids    to    the 
different  elements  is  justified  by  a  comparison  of  the 

1  54  d. 


72  THE    IDEAS   AS   'Apidfioi 

attributes  of  the  figures  with  those  of  the  elements 
they  denote.  As  earth  is  the  most  stable  of  elements, 
so  the  equilateral  triangle  and  the  square  are  the  most 
stable  of  plane,  and  the  cube  of  solid,  figures.  Fire  too, 
being  the  keenest  of  the  four  elements,  is  well  repre- 
sented by  the  pyramid,  which  is  the  sharpest  of  solid 
figures. 

These,  then,  being  the  figures  of  which  fire,  air, 
earth  and  water  are  constituted,  we  must  first  conceive 
of  each  of  them  as  being  in  isolation  too  small  to  affect 
the  eye ;  only  when  gathered  together  in  great  multi- 
tudes can  they  be  supposed  to  give  any  impression  of 
magnitude.  Next,  all  these  bodies,  three  of  which 
may  have  ceaseless  generation  into  one  another,  must 
be  regarded  as  continually  changing  their  positions, 
owing  to  the  vibration  of  the  vttoSo^t],  and  as  being 
inevitably  carried  towards  the  others  of  their  own  kind, 
inasmuch  as  similar  things  are  always  attracted  to- 
wards one  another,  and  there  is  no  arbitrary  distinction 
of  "  up  "  and  "  down."  In  the  course  of  this  vibration 
and  attraction  it  may  happen  that  the  octahedrons  of 
air,  or  the  icosahedrons  of  water,  become  divided  by 
the  keenness  of  the  pyramids  of  fire,  and  the  octahedron 
thus  changes  into  two  particles  of  fire,  and  the  icosahe- 
dron  becomes  one  particle  of  fire  and  two  of  air.  Earth, 
however,  can  only  be  dissolved  into  its  parts,  which 
thereupon  drift  about  till  they  can  be  united  once  more. 
But  on  this  principle  alone  it  would  seem  that  kindred 
particles  would  speedily  become  associated,  and  all  need 
of  further  disintegration  would  cease.  There  is,  accord- 
ingly, another  force  at  work,  which  prevents  such  stag- 
nation, viz.,  f]  rod  ttclvtos  irepiohos,  which  compresses  the 


THE   IDEAS   AS   'AptO/jLOL  73 

matter  of  the  universe  with  such  all-pervading  force  that 
no  intervals  are  suffered  to  remain  between  the  kinds, 
and  consequently  one  is  continually  being  compelled  to 
interpenetrate  the  other.  These  two  forces,  then,  the 
vibration  of  the  u7roSo%r/,  and  the  iriXrjat^  of  the 
revolving  universe,  combine  to  produce  eternal  move- 
ment and  disturbance  among  the  kinds. 

The  remainder  of  the  dialogue  is  occupied  by  a 
minute  examination  of  all  the  kinds  that  arise  by 
combination  of  these  four  elements,  together  with 
a  physiological  analysis  of  the  senses  and  the  bodily 
functions.  Within  the  elements  themselves,  we  are 
told,  there  are  distinct  yivrj,  which  owe  their  variety  to 
differences  of  size  in  the  primal  triangles  of  which  they 
are  composed.  But,  apart  from  these,  there  are  in- 
numerable compound  substances,  such  as  stone,  earthen- 
ware, salt,  formed  of  different  proportions  of  the  four 
elements.  Animal  and  vegetable  bodies,  both  in  whole 
and  in  part,  arise  out  of  one  or  other  combination  of 
fire,  air,  earth  and  water1.  Marrow,  bone,  flesh  and 
sinew  are  all  compounded  in  this  fashion2.  Everything 
in  the  universe,  in  fact,  as  far  as  its  materiality  is 
concerned,  may  be  built  up  out  of  fixed  proportions  of 
these  ingredients. 

It  is  now  time  to  turn  back  and  follow  up  the  course 
of  Plato's  argument  in  order  to  set  down  in  plain 
language  the  results  at  which  he  has  been  aiming.  If 
we  are  to  take  50  c  seriously,  Plato's  intention  has 
been  to  show  us  in  some  measure  how  the  elatovra 
teal  itjiovra,  the  ever-varying  flux  of  phenomena,  may 
be  regarded  as  the  representatives  in  space  of  im- 
1  73  b-e.  2  74  c,  d. 


74  THE   IDEAS   AS   WpiOfioi 

mutable  etSr/,  which  exist  eternally  and  are  independent 
of  actual  relation  to  space  and  time.  Our  object  then 
must  be,  first,  to  come  to  some  understanding  con- 
cerning the  viroSoxr],  in  which  phenomena  are  said 
to  arise,  and,  secondly,  to  discover  the  nature  of  the 
elSr]  of  fire,  etc.,  which  are  introduced  in  such  an 
emphatic  way  at  51  B.  We  shall  then  be  in  a  position 
to  draw  some  conclusions  regarding  the  aim  and  objects 
of  knowledge,  according  to  Plato's  latest  utterance  on 
the  subject. 

Those  who  would  interpret  the  Timaeus  literally 
seem  to  be  disposed  to  treat  the  vttoBoxv  as  an  actual 
K€v6v,  or  void,  like  that  of  Democritus,  in  which 
actual  atoms  did,  at  some  prehistoric  period  or  other, 
float  about  in  the  way  described.  This  view  is  of 
course  excluded  by  our  general  treatment  of  the 
dialogue,  but  there  are  besides  two  serious  considera- 
tions that  make  it  absolutely  impossible  to  hold  it  for 
a  moment.  First  of  all,  one  cannot  conceive  of  Plato 
as  being  willing  to  imitate  the  Atomists  after  the 
wholesale  contempt  which  he  has  poured  upon  them, 
not  only  in  previous  dialogues,  but  in  the  Timaeus 
itself1.  The  open  enemy  of  the  Atomists  is  not  likely 
to  adopt  their  materialistic  bases  and  automatic  process- 
es in  trying  to  account  for  an  orderly  world.  Secondly, 
the  whole  development  of  the  conception  of  the  vtto- 
Soxv  is  opposed  to  any  such  view.  Plato  is  obviously 
taking  the  material  world  as  it  is,  and  gradually 
abstracting  from  it  everything  of  a  bodily  nature. 
The  Kevbv  is  an  abstract  conception,  which  is  reached 
only  after  laborious  thought ;  it  is  not,  like  that  of 
1  See  46  d  ;  55  d.     Cf.  Soph.  265  c,  d. 


THE   IDEAS   AS   'ApidfiOL  75 

Democritus,  assumed  as  the  primary  condition  of  the 
universe.  From  pages  49  A  to  51  B,  which  are  devoted 
entirely  to  the  gradual  unfolding  of  the  notion  of  %copa, 
we  learn  that  it  is  that  which  remains  of  the  material 
world  when  it  is  divested  of  all  body,  shape  and 
quality.  It  is  that  underlying  principle  which  remains 
permanent  amid  their  everlasting  mutability,  and  may 
be  illustrated  by  the  example  of  gold,  upon  which  all 
manner  of  shapes  are  continually  impressed  and  as 
continually  obliterated.  It  is  plain  that  Plato's  whole 
endeavour  here  is  to  get  a  firm  grasp  of  the  notion  of 
space  by  abstraction,  for  he  can  only  conceive  of  it  by 
ridding  his  mind  of  the  actual  world  he  sees.  So  far 
from  describing  a  material  process  from  space  and 
atoms  to  actual  existence,  he  presents  us  here  with 
a  logical  progression  from  actual  existence  to  space 
and  the  geometrical  elements. 

What  then  is  the  nature  of  this  %wpa,  when  it  has 
at  length  been  reached  ?  Enough  has  been  said  to 
show  that  it  was  not  intended  for  an  actually  existent 
void.  Let  us,  therefore,  try  to  elicit  from  Plato's 
further  treatment  of  the  subject  some  information 
regarding  its  nature.  Plato,  having  conceived  the 
notion  of  the  substrate,  immediately  fills  it  with 
certain  elementary  triangles,  which  combine  in  certain 
fixed  modes  to  form  figures,  which  are  the  apxaL  °f 
the  four  elements  and  their  combinations.  Xcopa  also 
allows  of  the  activity  of  certain  forces,  which  unite  to 
keep  the  dpxai  in  a  state  of  continual  disturbance. 
Now,  these  rpiycova  are  manifestly  the  plane  triangles 
of  geometry,  the  perfect,  ideal  triangles  which  the 
crude   triangles  of  our  diagrams    affect  to   represent, 


76  THE    IDEAS   AS   "KptOfjuoi 

the  del  ovra  of  Republic  527  B,  which  are  a  stepping- 
stone  in  our  mental  progress  towards  the  I8ea  rdyaOov. 
This  conclusion  is  not  only  the  natural  inference  from 
Plato's  express  statement  at  53  c,  where  he  makes  it 
perfectly  plain  that  the  geometrical  laws  conditioning 
the  perception  of  solids  are  his  sole  consideration,  but 
it  is  the  only  explanation  that  tallies  with  the  details  of 
Plato's  exposition.  Mr  Archer-Hind,  at  pp.  203,  204 
of  his  edition  of  the  Timaeus,  has  pointed  out  that  no 
solid  bodies  could  fulfil  the  requirements  made  for  the 
pyramids,  octahedrons,  and  other  figures  in  c.  22.  Two 
solid  pyramids  could  not  possibly  be  transmuted  into 
a  solid  octahedron,  but,  according  to  the  geometrical 
law  regulating  pyramids  and  octahedrons,  two  pyra- 
mids consist  of  eight  equal  planes,  and  thus  supply  all 
that  is  theoretically  necessary  to  the  constitution  of  an 
octahedron. 

The  triangular  planes,  then,  and  the  figures  alike 
are  to  be  conceived  of  as  the  ideal  triangles  and  figures 
of  geometrical  definition,  the  perfect  and  immutable 
laws  which  form  the  foundation  of  the  sciences  called 
geometry  and  stereometry.  They  are  eternal  and 
immutable,  in  contradistinction  to  phenomenal  things 
which  are  apprehensible  by  the  senses  alone ;  and  yet 
they  are  iroWd,  inasmuch  as  their  multiplication  is 
theoretically  essential  to  the  production  of  more  ad- 
vanced figures.  These,  then,  are  the  arj^fiara  which 
Plato's  viroho'xr)  is  destined  to  contain,  and,  difficult 
though  it  be  to  define  its  nature,  we  are  assured 
that  our  explanation  of  it  must  be  consistent  with 
the  nature  of  the  rpiycova,  and  the  more  complex 
etSrj,  which  it  is  made  to  contain.     It  is,  accordingly, 


THE   IDEAS   AS   'AptOfioi  77 

impossible  either  to  regard  the  v7roSoxv  as  an  actual 
void,  or  to  connect  it  directly  with  the  world  of 
ytyvofieva  at  all;  Plato  has  indeed  taken  great  pains 
to  divest  it  of  all  trace  of  the  phenomenal.  It  is  an 
ideal  x^Pa>  the  X°^Pa  w^ich  is  logically  necessary  for 
the  operations  of  the  ideal  rpcycova  and  TrvpafdSe?  of 
true  geometry ;  it  is  a  %ft>pa  which  exists  in  the  mind 
alone,  Xoycp  TrepiXrjTTTov. 

It  will  be  remembered  that  we  noticed  some  attempt 
at  a  similar  analysis  in  the  Philebus.  There  Plato 
conceived  of  the  vXtj  ig  ov  yiyveTai  to  irav  as  sensible 
qualities,  abstracted  from  the  objects  in  which  they 
were  made  to  inhere  by  the  mind.  But  the  distinction 
between  the  vXrj  e£  ov  and  the  vXtj  iv  &  was  evidently 
unconsciously  present  to  his  mind,  for  he  spoke  of  a 
ehpa,  in  which  these  qualities  (to  /jl&XXov  re  /cat  tjttov) 
arise,  so  that  in  the  background  of  his  thoughts  there 
was  evidently  the  notion  of  a  vXrj  iv  &  as  well  as  of  a 
vXt)  e£  ov.  In  the  Timaeus  the  sensible  qualities,  the 
vXr)  it;  ov,  have  been  entirely  superseded.  Plato  seems 
to  have  become  more  and  more  convinced  of  their 
relative  and  secondary  character.  At  61  E  ff.  he  informs 
us  that  all  such  qualities  are  simply  the  varying  effects 
which  the  different  structures  of  the  elements  make 
upon  our  senses.  He  appears  to  have  examined  these 
qualities,  and  to  have  discovered  that  they  may  all 
ultimately  be  reduced  to  two,  or  rather  that  they  all 
depend  ultimately  upon  the  principle  of  two,  viz.,  to 
fiel^ov  /ecu  apbucpoTepov.  Spatial  extension  and  size  are 
the  fundamental  attributes  of  everything  bodily,  and 
accordingly  we  may  in  our  present  examination  discard 
vXr)  il;  ovy  and  concentrate  our  attention  upon  vXrj  iv 


78  THE   IDEAS   AS    'KpiOfioi 

w.  It  may  be  noted  that  Aristotle1,  ignoring  Plato's 
ultimate  rejection  of  antithetical  qualities  as  vXrj,  chose 
out  hot  and  cold,  wet  and  dry,  as  the  proximate  vXrj  of 
material  bodies,  probably  in  imitation  of  the  Philebus. 
The  Tpiycova  of  the  Timaeus  were  not  calculated  to 
appeal  to  his  practical  turn  of  mind. 

As  Plotinus2  indicates  in  the  Enneads,  one  thing 
may  be  said  to  be  in  another  quite  apart  from  any 
question  of  spatial  relation,  just  as  many  things  in- 
here in  mind,  and  hence  the  v7ro8oxv  possesses  only  a 
(jydvracrfjLa  of  07/co?.  From  chapter  20  onwards,  there- 
fore, we  have  before  us  the  conception  of  geometrical 
space,  containing  within  itself  the  dtSta  rpiycova,  and 
the  figures  formed  of  these,  which  are  the  ideal  counter- 
parts of  the  four  elements  of  the  universe ;  and  these 
apyai  inhere  in  it  not  in  a  state  of  rest,  but  they  are 
evermore  subject  to  two  forces,  which  Plato  felt  to  be  at 
work  in  the  material  universe.  The  vibration  and  the 
iriXricrLs,  too,  have  been  abstracted  from  the  confusion 
of  the  visible  objects  which  they  are  seen  to  affect,  and 
transferred  to  a  geometrical  region  where  their  opera- 
tions may  be  viewed  in  the  clear  light  of  the  intellect, 
and  set  down  in  fixed  and  unambiguous  formulae.  One 
is  forcibly  reminded  of  the  ov  ra%09  and  the  ovaa 
fipaSvrrjs  of  Republic  529  D,  also  of  the  true  heavens, 
wherein  there  moved  true  stars.  Plato's  whole  object 
in  this  exposition  of  physical  phenomena  has  been  to 
arrive  at  exactitude  of  some  kind,  to  be  able  to  state  in 
some  fixed  language  the  principles  of  order  that  underlie 


1  SeeAr.  de  gen.  et  corr.  B.  1.  329  a 24;  2.  329  b7;  3.  330  a  30. 

2  Plotinus,  Enneads  ii.  4.  11  (xii.  11  Kirchhoff). 


THE   IDEAS   AS    "KpiQjXOi  79 

the  yty  vofieva  of  the  universe.  Hence  the  whole  totality 
of  physical  yevecris  has  been  translated  into  ideal  being 
in  terms  of  mathematical  and  geometrical  relations. 

If  this  be  so,  what  are  we  to  say  about  the  ideas  of 
fire,  etc.,  to  which  special  attention  was  drawn  at  51  B  ? 
In  considering  this  question  we  should  bear  in  mind 
continually  the  fact  that  Plato's  point  of  view  has 
changed  since  we  last  heard  of  ideas  at  39  E,  and  that 
the  three-fold  classification  into  ov,  yiyvopuevov,  and 
vnrohoxv  must  needs  affect  to  some  extent  our  view  of 
to  ov.  For  to  ov  is  now  the  father,  and  %(£>pa  the  mother, 
ofyeveais ;  the  idea  is  not  wholly  responsible  for  its  copies, 
but  must  enter  into  relation  with  x^Pa  f°r  their  pro- 
duction. The  idea,  accordingly,  must  be  expressed  in  such 
terms  as  would  render  the  simile  appropriate.  The 
function  of  the  v-iroSo^rj  is  to  afford  room  for  yeveais ; 
it  is  the  recipient  of  all  that  is  spatial ;  the  idea,  then, 
must  be  conceived  as  far  as  possible  in  terms  consistent 
with  spatial  relation.  Plato,  immediately  after  he  has 
affirmed  the  existence  of  ideas  of  fire  and  the  rest, 
proceeds  to  give  an  account  of  the  Starafjis,  or  arrange- 
ment, of  each  of  these  bodies.  Fire,  it  is  discovered, 
has  as  its  intelligible  apxv  the  pyramid,  and  the 
pyramid  is  inevitably  composed  of  four  sets  of  six 
primal  scalene  triangles.  Similarly,  the  octahedron  and 
the  icosahedron,  being  the  apyai  °f  air  an(i  water 
respectively,  are  the  result  of  the  combination  of  eight, 
and  twenty,  sets  of  six  primal  scalenes.  Earth  has  for 
its  apx*l  the  cube,  to  compose  which  six  sets  of  four 
rectangular  isosceles  triangles  are  always  required.  ,Thus 
the  law  governing  fire -form  at  ion  is  that  24,  or  6x4, 
primal  scalenes  shall  combine  to  form  a  pyramid,  the 


80  THE   IDEAS   AS   "AptOfjioi 

dpxv  of  foe.  Air,  water,  and  earth  are  likewise  subject 
to  similar  laws ;  and  Plato,  by  taking  up  every  variety 
of  material  body  and  substance  in  turn,  might  have 
found  similar  laws  to  regulate  them  all.  In  the  case  of 
stone,  flesh,  bone,  and  the  like,  he  has  shown  us  how 
the  principle  works  out.  The  more  complex  structures 
of  the  bodies  of  animals,  however,  have  not  been 
directly  dealt  with,  but  that  Plato  conceived  them  too 
to  be  composed  of  primary  triangles  combined  in 
varying  ways  is  obvious  throughout  the  physiological 
discourse. 

These  material  laws,  then,  that  govern  all  the  kinds 
within  the  material  universe,  I  hold  to  be  the  ecSy  i^ 
eavToov  mentioned  at  51  B.  Such  a  view  finds  confirma- 
tion from  many  sources.  First,  one  cannot  but  feel  that 
material  bodies  such  as  fire,  air,  water  and  earth,  and 
their  combinations,  which  exist  simply  to  be  perceived 
by  sight  and  touch1,  and  are  mere  modes  of  matter, 
stand  on  quite  a  different  footing  from  the  fe3a,  that 
have  within  them  the  very  principle  of  life,  and  should, 
therefore,  receive  a  different  treatment.  We  cannot, 
accordingly,  include  these  ideas  of  fire  and  the  like 
among  the  first-mentioned  ideas  of  39  E,  the  vorjra  £o3a, 
which  were  special  aspects  of  the  supreme  and  ever- 
active  vovs.  At  the  same  time,  though  the  elements 
are  not  as  intimately  connected  as  the  £g3<z  with  the 
great  alria,  voi>s,  that  underlies  all  phenomena,  they 
are  none  the  less  eternal  manifestations  of  noetic  force. 
The  0€os  made  them  fair,  and  brought  them  into  order 
according  to  definite  and  eternal  laws.  These  laws, 
therefore,  are  not  unworthy  of  the  title  of  etBrj ;  they 

1  31b. 


THE   IDEAS   AS   'ApidfJiOl  81 

are    unbegotten,    imperishable,    invisible,    objects     of 
thought   alone. 

Secondly,  our  investigation  of  the  Philebus  resulted 
in  the  conviction  that  the  ideas  there  were  to  be  found 
in  the  class  of  fierpia,  the  eternal  laws  of  proportion, 
which  depend  for  their  realisation  on  mathematical 
Trocrd.  All  existing  fiucra,  we  found,  could  be  resolved 
into  two  elements,  of  which  the  v\rj  of  sensible  qualities 
was  one,  and  the  ideal  law  of  proportion  the  other, 
while  universal  vovs,  as  alria  rr)<;  /u£e<«>9,  was  the 
reality  yet  further  back  to  which  their  existence  could 
be  traced. 

A  third  confirmation  lies  in  the  fact  that  the  ecSrj 
as  dpcO/jiol  were  a  phase  of  the  ideas  which  attained 
considerable  importance  in  the  later  days  of  Plato's 
school,  and  which  was  always  said  by  Aristotle  to  have 
originated  in  the  teaching  of  the  master  himself,  in 
spite  of  all  the  accretions  of  the  Platonists  that  tended 
to  obscure  it.  A  minute  analysis  of  the  evidence  on 
this  point  awaits  us  in  a  later  paper;  but  it  is  quite 
clear  that  these  formative  laws  are  nothing  else  but 
dpi0fioL  Each  elSos  is  said  to  consist  of  definite 
dpi0/jLoi,  or  proportions,  of  primary  triangles,  and  Plato 
himself  uses  the  word  twice  in  his  exposition  of  the 
subject  (etSeal  re  teal  dptdpiol^,  53  B;  ig  oaoov  av/jL7re- 
aovrcov  dpiO/n&v,  54  d).  All  these  chapters,  indeed, 
breathe  the  spirit  of  the  mathematician.  Never  since 
the  Republic  has  Plato  given  the  subject  so  much 
attention,  or  assigned  to  it  so  lofty  a  function. 

Finally,  have  we  now  reached  the  limit  of  human 
knowledge  ?   From  the  first  the  eiSrj  ifi  eavrdov  were  to 
be  objects  of  human  knowledge,  and  now  the  possibility 
w.  6 


82  THE   IDEAS   AS   'AptOfMOL 

of  knowing  them  has  been  realised  beyond  dispute. 
But  are  we  to  stop  there  ?  Are  we  to  be  content  with 
knowing  the  fixities  inherent  in  matter,  eternal  and 
immutable  though  they  be,  and  never  penetrate 
further  ?  We  were  told  in  the  earlier  part  of  the 
Timaeus  that  there  was  an  ultimate  airia  for  all 
Becoming,  a  irapdhecy/jLa  for  all  creation.  Is  this  ever 
to  be  known  or  realised  ?  There  are  considerations 
which  seem  to  show  that  Plato  did  not  despair  of 
attaining  even  this  ambition.  It  must  be  remembered 
that  Plato  has  been  trying  to  work  back  to  the 
subjective  dpyal  °f  matter,  and  has  reduced  the 
various  material  kinds  to  the  primary  notions  on 
which  our  apprehension  of  them,  as  matter,  depends. 
After  all,  dpidfioi,  though  they  prove  to  us  the  presence 
of  vovs  in  the  world,  are  not  in  themselves  ultimate ; 
number  is  simply  a  necessity  of  our  mind,  as  essential  to 
its  working  as  the  categories  of  Same  and  Other.  Hence 
Plato,  in  resolving  matter  into  dptOjjioi,  has  resolved  it 
into  its  subjective  factors,  thereby  taking  us  to  the 
limit  of  the  analysis  the  finite  mind  can  reach.  May 
mind,  qua  infinite,  go  a  step  further,  and  pass  beyond 
the  subjective  dp^al  to  the  absolute  dp^v  of  all  ?  At 
53  D  we  are  told :  ra$  &  ert  tovtwv  dp^ds  dvcoOev  Oebs 
oZSe,  teal  dvSpoov  09  dv  etce'iva)  fyiXos  fj.  In  this  we  can 
only  see  a  hope  that  the  human  mind  may  some  time, 
somehow,  through  a  diligent  pursuit  of  the  etBrj  as 
dpiOfiol,  rise  to  a  still  higher  form  of  knowledge,  and 
know  by  direct  intuition  the  votjtov  £coov  and  the 
vorjrd  £wa,  which  represent  the  ideal  in  its  highest 
form.  As  in  the  Republic,  dpcOfjiol  are  to  be  the 
stepping-stones  to  the  realisation  of  the  Good ;  but  the 


THE    IDEAS   AS   'ApcdfMOL  83 

apc0/jLol  have  now  a  greater  importance  than  formerly, 
since  they  represent  the  highest  actual  point  which 
human  knowledge  has  yet  reached.  Ac6  Bij,  says  Plato, 
XPV  Sv  alrias  ecSr]  Siopu^eaOat,  to  fiev  avay/calov,  to 
8e  6elov,  kcli  to  /Jbev  Oelov  ev  airaac  ^r/Telv  kttJ<j€oo<; 
€veica  evSatfiovos  ficov,  tcaO'  ocrov  rjficov  rj  (pvarts  ivSe^eTac, 
to  Se  dvay/caiov  i/ceivcov  y&piv,  Xoyi^o/xevov,  a>?  dvev 
tovtcov  ov  SvvaTCi  avTa  i/celva,  i<f>  ols  o~7rovSd^ofji€V} 
nova  KCLTavoeiv,  ovS  av  \aj3elv,  ovh"  aWco?  7TO)? 
jjb€Taax€W-     (68  E — 69  A1.) 

Before  we  conclude  the  subject  of  the  apiQyioi, 
there  are  two  points  which  would  seem  to  demand 
some  further  elucidation.  The  first  is  concerned  with 
the  objective  reality  of  space.  We  realise  that  the 
X<*pa  of  the  Timaeus  is  not  an  actual  void,  but  an  ideal, 
mathematical  x^pa.  May  we  then  draw  any  conclusion 
as  to  whether  Plato  considered  space  to  have  independent 
existence,  or  whether  it  was  to  him  a  mere  illusion  ? 
Here,  of  course,  one  feels  the  inappropriateness  of  making- 
Plato  speak  in  Berkeleian  phraseology,  and  yet  it  is 
impossible  to  suppose  him  to  believe  that  space  was 
anything  in  itself.  The  whole  universe,  and  time  too, 
are  always  but  shadows  that  appeal  to  the  senses  alone. 
Fire,  air,  water,  and  earth,  which  constitute  the  material 
universe,  only  exist  for  the  sake  of  being  seen.  Qualities, 
which,  after  all,  are  what  we  have  most  in  mind  when 
we  allude  to  the  material  world,  are  just  affections  of  our 
senses,  caused  by  something,  it  is  true,  but  by  something 
of  alien  nature  to  the  things  we  see.  When  one  divests 
the  universe  of  these  qualities,  one  has  left  indeed  the 
vttoSoxv  yevecreoy^,  the  hvvafiLs  of  yevecns,  within  which 

1  Cf.  59,  60. 

6—2 


84  THE    IDEAS   AS    'Kpt9fioi 

to  reconstruct  ideally  the  eternal  principles  of  matter, 
but  this  has  no  objective  existence ;  it  is  a  (pdvraafjba. 
With  the  reduction  of  qualities  to  their  subjective 
factors,  one  rejects  the  independent  reality  of  the  whole 
material  universe,  and  consequently  of  extension  too, 
for  extension  can  never  have  actual  existence  apart 
from  extended  objects. 

The  second  subject  referred  to  is  that  of  the  doiovra 
kclI  i^Lovra,  which  have  usually  been  identified1  with 
the  /maOrj/jbari/cd,  or  rpiycova,  of  c.  20.  This  identification 
I  believe  to  be  impossible  for  the  following  reasons.  In 
the  first  place,  there  is  nothing  whatever  in  the  actual 
context  of  50  c  to  lead  one  to  associate  the  elatovra 
teal  i^iopra  with  fia 0tj fiar lk a  at  all.  There  has  as  yet 
been  no  mention  of  geometrical  forms.  Plato's  sole 
aim  here  is  to  reach  a  conception  of  pure  space  by 
stripping  the  world  of  every  visible  and  variable 
quality.  Space  is  that  ev  w  iyyvyvofieva  del  etcaara 
avToov  (pavrd^erac  koX  irakiv  iiceZOev  diroXkyrat^.  It  is 
f)  rd  TrdvTO,  hexo^evq  croo/jLara  cj)v(TL<;d,  which  nevertheless 
fiop(f)rjv  ovSe/jblav  irore  ovSevl  rdov  eiatovrcov  ofioiav 
€t\r)(f)€v  ovhafifj  ovSa/jLws*.  Hence  it  is  not  a  question  of 
triangles  at  all,  but  of  ytyvofieva,  which  are  in  continual 
flux. 

Secondly,  the  triangles  are  not  elcnovra  teal  igcovra; 
they  do  not  come  into  being  and  vanish,  for  they  are 
regarded  as  filling  up  every  nook  and  cranny  of  the 
vtto8oxv>  so  tlmt}  void  may  be  as  far  as  possible  non- 
existent. To  this  it  may  be  replied  that  the  particular 
combinations  of  triangles — pyramids,  octahedrons,  and 

1  e.g.  Adam's  Republic,  vol.  ii.  p.  161. 

2  49  e.  s  50  b.  4  50  c. 


THE   IDEAS    AS    'AptOfjLOL  85 

the  rest — come  and  vanish ;  but  even  so  the  vttoSoxv 
does  not  rid  itself  of  fjuaOrj /xan ted,  the  constituent 
triangles  being  always  constant1,  and  the  cube  does  not 
suffer  destruction  at  all.  How  could  the  elaiovra  teal 
e^uovra,  which  are  admittedly  always  coming  and 
going,  be  identical  with  fiadrj  part  ted,  or  the  Trepas 
e^ovra  of  the  Philebus,  which  are  directly  opposed  to 
that  which  is  in  flux  ?  The  eiatovra  teal  igtovra  are 
akin,  if  to  anything,  to  the  direipa,  which  are  subject 
to  unceasing  fluctuation.  But  fjuaOrj/jLarcted  represent 
measurement  and  definiteness,  and  are  of  a  totally 
different  nature. 

Thirdly,  mathematics  have  always  held  an  exceed- 
ingly high  place  in  Plato's  esteem,  their  objects  being 
del  ovra,  and  akin  to  the  ideas.  It  is  inconceivable  that 
he  should  here  degrade  fiaO^fiartted  to  the  level  of 
phenomena,  and  say  that  they  are  merely,  like  them, 
jjUfjLrjIiaTa  to)v  del  ovrcov  2. 

The  reason  why  these  elaiovra  teal  egtovra  have  been 
taken  for  naOrj  panted  is  apparently  that  they  have  been 
confused  with  the  fiopfyal  and  axv^^cc  which  occur  in 
the  simile  of  the  gold,  which  is  employed  as  an  illus- 
tration. In  the  simile  the  shapes  impressed  on  the 
gold  are  the  counterpart  of  the  elaiovra  teal  e%i6vray 
because  the  gold  has  to  correlate  with  the  substrate  ; 
but  since  the  substrate  has  to  be  devoid,  not  only  of 
shape,  but  quality  of  every  kind,  it  is  impossible  to  con- 
clude that  shapes  alone  are  supposed  to  enter,  and 
vanish  from,  the  virohoxrj.  Plato  certainly  does  not  say 
so ;  he  calls  the  viroho^rj  77  rd  irdvra  Se^o/juevr]  acofiaTa 
<f>v<TL<;,  and  the  ao^/jbara  that  come  and  go  are  generally 
1  56  d.  2  50  c. 


86  THE   IDEAS   AS   'ApiOfJLOL 

styled  ra  elatovra  /cat  i^iovra.  The  use  of  i8ea  and 
eZSo9  occasionally  at  50  D,  E,  and  51  A,  need  not  be  taken 
to  imply  that  shape  alone  is  intended,  since  the  language 
here  is  particularly  affected  by  the  simile  of  the  gold 
previously  referred  to,  and  form  is  for  the  nonce  regarded 
as  the  typical  attribute  of  body.  The  simile  of  the 
unguents1,  to  produce  which  varied  scents  are  imparted  to 
a  scentless  fluid,  apparently  serves  Plato's  purpose  just 
as  well  as  that  of  the  gold.  Shape,  consequently,  is  not 
the  essential  point  in  the  simile ;  if  any  further  proof 
were  wanted,  the  final  moral  of  the  passage  at  51  A  should 
suffice  :  Sid  Srj  ttjv  tov  yeyovoros  oparov  ical  iravro)^ 
ataOrjTOv    fjarjrepa    /cal    vttoBo^tjp    fjbrjre  yrjv  /mrjTe  depa 

/JL7]T€  7TVp  /JLT/Te  vScOp  \€<y(D/ji€V,  /JL7]T€  OCTCl   €K  TOVTCOV,   firjT6 

ef  cop  ravra  yeyovev  (i.e.  the  qualities  of  the  Philebus). 
That  is,  the  elacovra  koX  i^tovra  of  the  vttoSoxv^  as 
opposed  to  those  of  the  gold,  are  visible  air,  earth, 
fire,  water,  and  their  constituents  and  compounds,  not 
/jLa0r)fjLaTLfca  at  all. 

Looking  backward  over  the  road  that  we  have 
travelled  since  a  theory  of  knowledge  was  first  stated  in 
the  Republic,  we  find  that  Plato  has  done  much  to  justify 
the  hope  which  he  there  set  before  us.  The  dialectician 
was  to  start  from  the  world  of  sensible  objects,  and, 
through  the  continuous  assumption  of  immutable  elhrj, 
rise  to  the  highest  idea  of  all,  an  apxv  avwirodeTos.  In 
the  interval  he  has  concluded  that  many  things  of  which 
he  then  posited  ecSrj  are  but  instruments  to  help  us 
along  the  road  to  knowledge ;  they  can  never  serve  as 
its  end  and  goal.  Antithetical  qualities,  for  instance, 
are  but  the  terminology  of  the  senses.     The  Good  and 

1  50  e. 


THE   IDEAS   AS   'Apcd/JLOi  87 

Beautiful  are,  generally  speaking,  the  leading  predicates 
of  the  science  of  aesthetics.  The  categories  of  Same 
and  Other  are  not  ideas,  though  they  are  of  the  utmost 
importance  to  the  operations  of  vovs  and  acadrjat^  alike. 
They  are  the  basis  of  all  classification,  and  through  them 
alone  can  we  hope  to  climb  the  ladder  of  knowledge  at 
all.  They  are  the  foundation  of  the  mathematical 
sciences,  which  lead  us  to  the  very  forecourt  of  the 
dya06v,  and  which,  in  default  of  the  dyaOov  itself, 
furnish  us  with  intermediate  elh-q.  He  who  would 
make  the  ascent  to  the  supreme  idea  must,  there- 
fore, begin  with  the  scientific  classification  of  the 
objects  of  sense,  through  which  such  information  and 
intellectual  power  may  be  acquired  as  to  enable  him  to 
posit  the  existence  of  mathematical  ideas,  hypotheses 
whose  truth  can  only  be  assured  when  they  have  found 
confirmation  in  the  dpxv  dwrroderos.  Having  attained  to 
them  he  already  has  an  ideal  explanation  of  phenomena, 
and  by  diligent  study  he  may  hope  to  imitate  in  ever- 
growing perfection  the  motions  of  the  dXrjOivo?  ical 
deios  1/01)9,  and  realise  in  some  degree  the  end  and  aim 
of  being,  the  dyaOov,  b  S?)  Sido/cec  fxev  airaaa  ^f%?}  teal 

TOVTOV    €V€/Ca    TTaVTCL    7TpdTT€C,   d7TOfiaVT€VOfl€Vr]    TL   €LVCU, 

diropovaa  he  teal  ovtc  eyovcra  \a/3elv  l/cavoos  ri  ttot  early 
ovhe  TTiGTei  xprjaaadaL  /xovifMcp,  01a  teal  irepi  rd\\a,  hid 
Tovro  he  diroTvyydvei  /cat  twv  dWcov,  el  rt  o<pe\o$  tfv. 
(Rep.  505  E.) 


ESSAY  V. 

THE  PYTHAGOREAN  *Api0fiol  AND  THEIR  RELATEON 
TO   THE   PLATONIC   IDEAS. 

The  subject  of  Plato's  indebtedness  to  Pythagorean 
philosophy  is  one  which  most  authorities  agree  to  disre- 
gard and  minimise  as  far  as  they  consistently  can.  This 
is  due  partly  to  the  fact  that  the  mists  of  neo-Platonism 
and  neo-Pythagoreanism,  creeping  in  between  Plato  and 
ourselves,  have  so  obscured  the  original  outlines  of  the 
two  schools  that  it  seems  well-nigh  impossible  to  discover 
where  Pythagoreanism  ends  and  Platonism  begins,  and 
partly  to  the  difficulty  one  always  experiences  in  trying 
to  elicit  from  Aristotle,  our  only  accredited  witness,  any 
unbiassed  account  of  previous  schools  of  thought.  The 
whole  question,  in  fact,  is  one  that  calls  for  the  exercise 
of  the  critical  faculty  rather  than  the  laborious  collection 
of  evidence.  In  the  present  paper,  therefore,  I  do  not 
intend  to  investigate  and  catalogue  the  latent  resem- 
blances between  the  two  schools  so  much  as  to  indicate 
the  great  advance  which  was  made  by  the  theory  we 
were  last  considering  upon  the  early  fancies  of  the 
Pythagoreans.  My  first  task  will  be  to  try  to  come  to 
some  definite  conclusions  as  to  what  the  Pythagoreans 
really  held ;  my  second  to  compare  their  views  with  the 


THE   PYTHAGOREAN   'ApiOfjbOL  89 

mature  doctrine  of  dptO/jLol  which  Plato  had  reached  in 
the  latter  half  of  the  Timaeus. 

The  evidence  for  the  genuine  beliefs  of  the  Pytha- 
goreans is  perforce  restricted  to  that  afforded  by 
Aristotle  in  various  parts  of  his  Metaphysics.  All  other 
writers,  such  as  Strabo,  Stobaeus,  and  Alexander 
Aphrodisiensis,  who  give  details  concerning  their 
doctrines,  lived  at  too  late  a  date  to  escape  the  con- 
tamination of  the  neo-Pythagorean  craze  of  the  first 
century  B.  c.  Confining  ourselves  then  to  Aristotle,  let 
us  set  down  the  substance  of  the  Pythagorean  doctrine 
as  stated  in  c.  v.  of  Metaphysics  A  and  elsewhere. 
From  the  earliest  times,  we  learn,  the  Pythagoreans 
were  expert  mathematicians,  and  their  chief,  and, 
perhaps,  earliest,  dogma  was  that  all  things  are  number. 
To  quote  the  account  in  Metaphysics  N1 :  "The  Pytha- 
goreans, because  they  perceived  many  of  the  attributes 
of  numter~totnTiere  in  visible  bodies,  held  that  existing 
things  were  numbers ;  and  these  numbers  were  not 
separate  from,  but  immanent  in,  things.  And  why  ? 
Because  numerical  relations  are  inherent  in  harmony, 
and  in  the  heavens,  and  in  many  other  things.'  We 
gather,  then,  that  Pythagoras  and  the  Pythagoreans 
were  impressed  by  the  potency  and  utility  of  number, 
in  the  first  instance,  through  their  mathematical  and 
musical  experiments.  In  music,  Pythagoras  himself 
had  tested  its  value  by  his  discovery  of  the  chief 
intervals  of  the  scale2 :  the  quality  of  different  notes  was 
found  to  depend  upon  the  proportionate  lengths  of  the 
monochord  which  was  struck  to  produce  them.  Philolaus, 
their  great  astronomer,  had  made  plain  the  intricate 
1  Met.  N.  3.  1090 a  20.  2  Cf.  Diog.  Laert.  viii.  12. 


♦•• 


90  THE   PYTHAGOREAN    'ApiOflol   AND    THEIR 

harmony  and  regularity  with  which  the  heavenly  bodies 
performed  their  courses.  It  was  borne  in  upon  them 
in  general  that  the  numerical  properties  of  a  thing  were 
its  essential  attributes,  the  most  definite  account  that 
could  be  given  of  it.  Consequently  they  were  led  to 
affirm  boldly  that  things  are  number,  and  that  the 
opposite  characteristics  that  appertain  to  things  are  but 
varieties  of  the  ultimate  opposition  of  odd  and  even. 
We  are  told  in  Metaphysics  A,  c.  v.,  that  some  Pytha- 
goreans, notably  Alcmaeon  of  Croton,  resolved  number 
into  two  constituents,  the  odd  and  the  even,  or,  in 
geometrical  terms,  the  finite  and  the  infinite,  and 
declared  that  these  constituents,  under  a  variety  of 
names,  were  the  constituents  of  all  existing  things. 
Alcmaeon  was  so  interested  in  this  point  that  he  drew 
up  a  lengthy  table  of  the  most  striking  oppositions  of 
this  kind ;  and  the  antithesis  in  the  first  column  was 
invariably  regarded  as  the  source  of  good,  that  in  the 
second  as  the  origin  of  evil,  in  the  things  which  it  helped 
to  constitute. 

But  what  was  their  precise  meaning  when  they  said 
all  things  are  number  ?  Aristotle  tells  us  plainly  enough 
that  they  regarded  numbers  as  the  material  cause  of 
things1,  and  that  the  numbers,  instead  of  being  yodpiaTa, 
were  actually  immanent  in  the  things  themselves ;  nay, 
the  things  were  number.  He  thereupon  proceeds,  in 
c.  viii.2,  to  draw  a  ludicrous  picture  of  the  Pythagorean 
universe,  in  which  the  absurdity  of  the  theory  is  made 
manifest.  The  Pythagoreans,  he  says,  made  the  whole 
universe  to  consist  of  number,  and  it  was  primarily  the 
heavens,  the  heavenly  bodies,  and  all  the  inferior  objects 
1  A.  6.  987  b  27.  2  A.  8.  990*19. 


RELATION  TO  THE  PLATONIC  IDEAS       91 

of  perception,  that  they  sought  to  explain  by  an  elaborate 
use  of  their  dpyai  Even  thus  far  one  can  scarcely 
follow  them,  seeing  that  they  leave  motion  entirely 
unexplained  ;  but  what  are  we  to  think,  says  Aristotle, 
when  they  extend  their  theory  even  to  things  that  are 
higher  in  the  category  of  reality  than  visible  objects,  to 
abstract  conceptions,  to  86%a,  tcaipos,  dhiKia,  Kpicns  or 
tufys?  For  they  have  shown  conclusively  that  each 
of  these,  too,  is  a  number.  How  can  we  accept  this, 
knowing  that  there  is  only  one  kind  of  number,  that  of 
which  external  nature  is  composed?  One  would  expect 
to  find  at  least  two  different  classes  of  dpiOfjuol,  one 
appropriate  to  visible  objects,  and  another  to  be  reserved 
for  vorjrd.  Are  we  to  imagine  a  universe  in  which  are 
to  be  found,  not  only  the  numbers  of  all  alaOrjTa,  but 
the  numbers  of  all  vorjrd  too  ?  Dire  overcrowding  would 
be  the  result ;  yet  they  cannot  surely  refuse  to  admit 
into  their  world  the  number  of  86%a}  when  they  say 
that  all  numbers  alike  have  fieyeOos,  and  are  inseparable 
from  the  world  of  sense. 

This  criticism  unmistakeably  breathes  the  Aristo- 
telian spirit.  One  instinctively  feels  that  the  writer  is 
not  only  captious,  but  biassed  by  his  scientific  point  of 
view,  and  that  one  may  be  reading  a  mere  travesty  of 
Pythagorean  ideas.  One  has  only  to  recall  the  material- 
istic account  of  the  ^v^oyovia  of  the  Timaeus1  to  realise 
that  the  most  philosophical  conceptions  may  at  times  be 
set  down  by  Aristotle  as  sheer  materialism.  It  is,  there- 
fore, imperative  to  examine  Aristotle's  statements 
regarding  the  Pythagoreans  thoroughly  before  accepting 
them  as  an  authentic  account  of  the  facts. 
1  De  An.  A.  2.  404  b  16. 


92  THE    PYTHAGOREAN    'Aptd/nol    AND   THEIR 

First  of  all,  he  classes  the  Pythagoreans  with  the 
Ionian  nature-philosophers  as  seeking  for  reality  in 
alaOrjTa  rather  than  in  vorjra,  and  then  immediately 
taxes  them  with  inconsistency  in  admitting  vorjrd  into 
the  sphere  of  their  studies,  and  accounting  for  them  on 
the  same  principle  as  alaOrjrn.  Now  if  the  Pytha- 
goreans tried  to  account  for  voijrd  and  alaOrjrd  alike,  it 
is  at  once  obvious  that  Aristotle  has  little  or  no  justifi- 
cation for  classing  them  with  the  nature-philosophers  of 
Ionia,  who  concerned  themselves  with  alaO^rd  alone. 
Quite  apart  from  the  question  whether  their  explanation 
of  things  sensible  and  spiritual  was  reasonable  or  not, 
the  mere  circumstance  that  they  took  account  of 
spiritual  phenomena  is  sufficient  to  separate  them  from 
the  early  Ionians,  and  in  all  probability  Aristotle  is  doing 
them  an  injustice  in  criticising  them  as  if  they  looked 
at  things  from  the  same  point  of  view  as  these.  The 
fact  that  Aristotle  at  the  beginning1  cites  as  typical 
examples  of  their  dpid/juol  the  numbers  of  Stfcaioavvr], 
/cacpos,  and  vovs,  and  never  instances  numbers  of  sensible 
things,  shows  that  spiritual  phenomena  were  no  mere 
appendage  in  their  system ;  they  cannot  have  been 
introduced,  as  some  think,  as  "a  mere  sport  of  the 
analogical  fancy2."  In  fact,  I  regard  this  two-fold 
application  of  the  Pythagorean  numbers  as  the  funda- 
mental objection  to  any  view  which  makes  them  in  any 
sense  a  materialistic  system. 

The  opposite  theory,  however,  is  so  strongly  main- 
tained by  Prof.  Burnet  in  his  Early  Greek  Philosophy 
that  it  would  be  as  well  to  consider  for  a  moment  the 

1  Met.  A.  5.  985  b  29. 

2  See  Burnet,  Early  Greek  Philosophy,  p.  317. 


RELATION  TO  THE  PLATONIC  IDEAS        93 

arguments  by  which  he  supports  it.  His  opinion  is 
based  mainly  on  the  belief  that  the  Pythagoreans  were 
the  originators  of  the  doctrine  that  the  point  is  identical 
with  the  monad  or  unit,  that  the  line,  being  the  first 
increase  of  the  point,  is  duality,  that  the  surface  is  the 
increase  of  duality  to  the  number  three,  and  so  on. 
Thus,  by  identifying  the  point  with  the  Pythagorean 
monad,  which,  according  to  Aristotle  l,  had  fjueyetfos,  and 
regarding  the  line  as  the  material  increase  of  this  to  two 
units,  Prof.  Burnet  thinks  a  reasonable  origin  may  be 
found  for  Aristotle's  statement  that  the  Pythagoreans 
made  number  the  material  cause  of  things.  But  surely, 
if  a  point  be  regarded  as  having  fjueyeOos,  it  is  to  all 
intents  and  purposes  not  a  point,  but  a  solid  body,  and 
the  three  increases  from  point  to  line,  from  line  to 
surface,  and  from  surface  to  solid,  are  no  longer  neces- 
sary to  produce  a  three-dimensional  body.  Therefore, 
although  it  is  possible  that  the  Pythagoreans 2  had  not 
yet  reached  an  abstract  conception  of  the  point,  the 
line,  or  the  surface,  I  cannot  agree  that  they  held  the 
view  indicated  by  Prof.  Burnet.  On  the  contrary,  the 
resolution  of  the  point  into  the  monad,  and  of  the  line 
into  duality,  would  naturally  belong  to  a  period  in  which 
the  science  of  geometry  had  been  subjected  to  speculative 
analysis ;  and  this  period  could  hardly  have  been  that 
of  the  Pythagoreans,  seeing  that  Aristotle  himself 
agrees  that  they  were  entirely  unversed  in  logic3,  or 
dialectic,  in  any  degree.  It  is  far  more  likely  that  the 
view  in  question  arose  in  the  time  of  Plato 4,  or  that  of 
his  immediate  predecessors. 

1  See  Met.  M.  6.  1080  b  20,  32 ;  M.  8.  1083  b  13. 

2  See  R.  and  P.  105  a. 

3  Met.  A.  6.  987  b  32.     «  Cf.  Rep.  528  a  sqq.  ;  Laws  894  a. 


94  THE   PYTHAGOREAN   "ApiOfMol   AND   THEIR 

Moreover,  when  one  comes  to  examine  the  evidence 
for  this  so-called  spatial  character  of  the  Pythagorean 
theory,  it  is  found  to  consist  entirely  of  Aristotelian 
references  which  either  do  not  apply  conclusively  to  the 
Pythagoreans,  or  are  to  be  discounted  either  because  of 
Aristotle's  materialistic  bias,  or  for  other  reasons.  The 
references  in  which  Aristotle1  is  supposed  to  say  that 
the  Pythagoreans  identified  the  line  with  duality 
cannot  by  any  stretch  of  language  be  proved  to  point  to 
the  Pythagoreans ;  on  the  contrary,  the  text  seems  to 
indicate  that  the  later  Platonists  alone  can  be  intended, 
and  the  same  criticism  applies  to  the  passages2  in  which 
the  Pythagoreans  are  supposed  to  make  the  monad  and 
the  point  identical.  As  for  the  statement  that  the 
monad  or  unit,  according  to  the  Pythagoreans3,  had 
/jieyedos,  here  Aristotle  is  simply  telling  his  old  story 
over  again,  and  representing  the  Pythagorean  number 
as  a  material  basis,  without  inspiring  any  additional 
confidence  in  his  view,  or  taking  account  of  the  funda- 
mental objection  which  was  mentioned  before.  The 
passages  in  Aristotle's  Physics4,  in  which  the  Pythago- 
rean void  is  identified  with  the  aireipov,  prove  nothing, 
since  the  term  aireipov  might  quite  well  be  applied  to 
the  void  without  indicating  necessarily  that  the  airetpov 
is  inevitably  a  res  externa,  or  that  number,  of  which  it 
is  sometimes  a  vToiy/iov,  is  invariably,  or  originally, 
spatial.  The  reference  to  Eurytus5,  in  which  the  latter 
is  said  to  have  tried  to  arrive  at  the  numbers  of  man, 


1  Met.   Z.  11.  1036 b  12.  Cf.  de  An.   iii.  c.  4.  429b  20;  de  Caelo  a. 
1.  268a7. 

2  Met.  Z.  2.  1028b  16.  3  See  p.  93. 

4  Phys.  T.  4.  203  a  7 ;  A.  6.  213  b  23. 

5  Met.  N.  5.  1092  b  10.  Cf.  M.  8.  1083  b  18. 


RELATION   TO   THE    PLATONIC    IDEAS  95 

horse,  etc.,  by  sketching  their  outlines,  and  counting 
the  number  of  pebbles  required  to  produce  them,  comes 
nearest  to  supporting  Prof.  Burnet's  theory.  In  isola- 
tion, however,  it  cannot  be  said  to  carry  conviction, 
since,  in  the  first  place,  the  process  described  is 
extremely  obscure,  and  it  is  hard  to  say  exactly  what 
Eurytus  was  aiming  at,  and,  secondly,  one  can  quite 
well  imagine  the  Pythagoreans  using  childish  methods 
of  this  kind  to  arrive  at  the  numbers  of  concrete  things, 
without  asserting  that  their  whole  theory  arose  in  this 
way.  The  particular  method  ascribed  to  Eurytus  was 
very  likely  only  one  of  the  ways  which  the  younger 
Pythagoreans  employed  to  give  the  master's  theory  a 
universal  application.  I  cannot,  therefore,  regard  any 
of  this  evidence  as  conclusive  in  proving  that  the 
number-doctrine  had  a  spatial  or  geometrical  origin. 
It  will  appear  that  little  or  no  satisfaction  is  to  be 
had  by  regarding  the  Pythagorean  philosophy  through 
the  eyes  of  later  schools.  A  truer  insight,  it  seems  to 
me,  may  be  gained  if  we  go  back  in  thought  to  a  period 
anterior  to  that  of  Pythagoras  himself,  and  endeavour 
for  a  moment  to  view  him  rather  as  the  heir  of  Egyptian 
and  Babylonian  mysticism1,  than  as  the  forerunner  of 
Plato.  Here,  of  course,  one  is  approaching  a  field  of 
research  which  is  as  yet  only  beginning  to  yield  definite 
results,  and  from  which  a  rich  harvest  may  be  expected 
in  the  future.     Sufficient  evidence,  however,  is  to  be 

1  I  am  of  course  using  "  mysticism "  here  in  the  sense  in  which  it 
is  most  applicable  to  Eastern  beliefs,  as  the  association  of  divinity 
with  certain  material  symbols  for  purely  fanciful  reasons,  quite  apart 
from  any  intellectual  process.  (See  Inge,  Christian  Mysticism, 
Appendix  B.) 


96  THE    PYTHAGOREAN   'Api6fiol    AND   THEIR 

found  in  hieroglyphic  and  hieratic  literature 1  to  make  it 
practically  certain  that  the  Egyptians  in  ancient  times 
attributed  not  merely  to  numbers  but  to  the  spoken 
word  in  general  a  curious  and  mysterious  potency  which 
is  wholly  foreign  to  western  nations.  In  the  Pyramid 
Texts,  in  fact,  we  find  mentioned  a  god  called  Khern, 
i.e.  "Word"  (compare  \0709).  That  which  to  us  is  simply 
an  instrument  of  expression,  created  by  man  to  serve  the 
necessities  of  human  intercourse,  was  regarded  by  them 
as  belonging  to  an  independent  order  of  existence  with 
a  vitality  of  its  own,  and  endowed  with  all  the  at- 
tributes that  compose  the  description  of  a  living  thing. 
The  "word"  had  a  personality  like  that  of  a  human 
being2,  and,  provided  it  were  pronounced  in  the  proper 
manner,  and  in  the  proper  tone  of  voice,  was  powerful 
in  the  service  of  him  by  whom  it  was  uttered.  The 
creation  of  the  world  was  due  to  the  interpretation  in 
words  by  Thoth  of  the  will  of  the  deity. 

Number  especially  seems  to  have  been  invested  by 
the  Egyptians  with  these  peculiar  powers.  By  the 
four-fold  repetition  of  their  curse-formula,  under  proper 
conditions3,  the  speedy  realisation  of  their  desires  was 
ensured.  This  potency  of  four  is  connected  by  some 
with  the  gods  of  the  four  points  of  the  compass,  but  it  may 
have  a  far  less  obvious  explanation.  Their  all-powerful 
and  beneficent  deities  were  classed  mainly  in  groups  of 
odd  numbers4,  especially  of  nine  and  seven,  and,  of  course, 
the  famous  three.     This  preference  for  odd  numbers  in 

1  See  Dr  Budge,  Egyptian  Magic,  preface,  pp.  x.,  xi. 

2  See  Dr  Budge,  translation  of  Book  of  the  Dead,  p.  147. 

3  Dr  Budge,  Egyptian  Religion,  p.  107. 

4  Dr  Budge,  Egyptian  Religion,  pp.  89-91. 


RELATION  TO  THE  PLATONIC  IDEAS        97 

representing  divinity  seems  to  indicate  that  the  odd 
numbers  had  with  them,  as  with  the  Pythagoreans  after 
them,  a  pre-eminence  over  the  even  as  being  a  power 
for  good.  Seven  also  played  an  important  part  in  their 
rites  and  ceremonies.  The  Book  of  the  Dead  tells  of 
the  seven  Arits  or  halls1  in  each  of  which  three  gods 
were  seated,  guarded  by  seven  doorkeepers,  seven 
watchers,  and  seven  heralds,  and  of  the  seventh  formula 
which,  when  recited,  procured  entrance  at  the  door  of 
any  one  of  the  seven  mansions  of  Osiris. 

The  Babylonians,  too,  apparently,  gave  special 
prominence  to  number  ;  like  the  Pythagoreans  they 
realised  its  value  in  the  practical  sciences  of  calculation, 
and  they  also  regarded  it  as  of  mystical  significance. 
There  is  evidence  to  prove2  that  their  multiplication 
table  was  remarkably  well-developed,  that  they  counted 
up  to  12,960,000,  and  that  their  tables  of  weights  and 
measures  were  very  far  advanced.  Their  measurements 
of  time  seem  to  have  been  based  on  the  division  of  the 
zodiac  into  twelve  parts3 :  thus  the  Babylonian  day  was 
made  to  consist  of  twelve  double-hours,  as  the  faces  of 
our  clocks  still  indicate.  That  they  assigned  magical 
properties  to  number  and  preferred  one  number  over 
another  is  plain  from  the  fact  that  they  invariably 
regarded  some  days  as  lucky,  others  (particularly  the 
seventh)  as  unlucky.  The  importance  of  the  number 
seven,  not  only  among  the  Babylonians,  but  with  the 
Eastern   nations   generally,   is    of    course    abundantly 

1  Egyptian  Magic,  p.  165. 

2  See  Hilprecht,  The  Nippur  Expedition,  pp.  28  ff. 

3  Cf.  Winckler,  Die  Weltanschauung  des  Alten  Orients  (Leipzig, 
1903). 

w.  7 


98  THE   PYTHAGOREAN   'ApcOfjiol   AND   THEIR 

illustrated  in  the  Old  Testament  writings — in  the  seven 
towers  of  Babel,  and  the  numerous  repetitions  of  seven 
in  the  instructions  regarding  Jewish  ritual  (e.g. 
Leviticus  4.  6;  14.  16,  51;  Numbers  23;  Ezek.  40. 
22). 

Now,  although  the  evidence  which  has  as  yet  come 
to  light  is  but  slight,  it  is  at  least  clear  that  the 
Egyptians  and  Babylonians  assigned  to  number  a  great 
importance,  and  attached  to  it  the  functions  of  an 
independent  agency  in  a  fashion  that  appears  strange 
to  western  minds.  They  regarded  it  as  something 
endued  with  power  to  heal  or  to  harm,  to  create  or  to 
destroy,  according  as  its  nature,  being  good  or  bad, 
prompted.  Like  the  "  word,"  it  could  be  described  by 
attributes,  favourable  or  unfavourable,  such  as  were 
applied  to  human  agents  themselves.  If  this,  then, 
was  the  general  attitude  of  the  East  towards  number 
in  ancient  times,  if  it  was  regarded  almost  with  the  awe 
and  reverence  due  to  Deity  itself,  it  would  be  little 
wonder  that  there  should  arise  a  school,  peculiarly 
subject  to  Oriental  influence,  whose  leading  tenet  was 
that  number  is  the  sole  arbiter  of  life.  There  is  no 
need  to  prove  that  Pythagoras  ever  had  actual  dealings 
with  Egypt,  Babylon,  or  any  other  Eastern  country ;  it 
is  undeniable  that  his  system  was  chiefly  a  farrago  of 
religious  and  mathematical  precepts,  which  are  ana- 
logous to  Eastern,  rather  than  Hellenic,  thought. 

The  remarkable  importance  assigned  by  the 
Egyptians  to  the  more  general  "word"  seems  to 
have  borne  fruit  at  a  later  time,  and  to  have  led, 
directly  or  indirectly,  to  a  form  of  the  Heracleitean 
philosophy   which    gave    to   words  and  names  a  per- 


RELATION   TO    THE    PLATONIC    IDEAS  99 

manence  which  was  denied  to  the  visible  things  of  the 
universe.  The  Heracleitean  Cratylus1,  who  thus  saw  in 
ovofiara  the  inmost  reality  of  the  fluctuating  objects  of 
sense,  could  not  conceivably  be  termed  a  materialist. 
Why  then  should  Pythagoras,  the  heir  of  Egyptian  and 
Babylonian  mysticism,  be  accused  of  materialism  for 
declaring  that  numbers,  to  which  the  learned  people  of 
the  East  had  always  attributed  the  greatest  magical 
significance,  are  the  truest  reality  of  things,  that  things 
are  really  number  ?  An  assertion  of  this  sort  did  not 
necessitate  any  art  of  ScaXeKn/ctj,  which  we  know 
Pythagoras  lacked ;  to  make  it  there  was  needed  only 
the  impetuous  logic  of  the  religious  enthusiast,  which 
Pythagoras  certainly  was.  The  induction  which  he  drew 
was  neither  that  of  the  physicist,  nor  of  the  philosopher, 
but  that  of  the  mystic. 

My  contention,  therefore,  is  that  the  Pythagorean 
doctrine  described  by  Aristotle  is  far  more  reasonably 
regarded  as  the  natural  development  of  a  mystical  view 
of  numbers  than  as  a  truly  philosophical  or  physical 
system.  Aristotle,  impatient  as  he  was  of  everything 
pertaining  to  the  occult,  might  quite  well  describe  such 
a  system  in  the  obscure  and  self-contradictory  language 
which  we  have  noted.  The  point  upon  w^hich  he  insists 
throughout  is  that  the  Pythagorean  numbers  were  not 
abstract  conceptions  (xcoptard),  like  those  of  Plato. 
The  Pythagoreans  had  not,  in  fact,  advanced  sufficiently 
in  scientific  speculation  to  make  the  abstract  calculations 
of  our  own  time :  when  they  counted  it  was  always 
apparently  with  a  reference  to  external  objects  of  one 
kind  or  another.  Aristotle,  therefore,  concludes  that 
1  See  Plato,  Cratylus  386  d,  e  ;  390  d,  e. 

7 9 


100         THE    PYTHAGOREAN    'ApiOfiol   AND   THEIR 

their  doctrine  that  things  are  number  can  only  mean 
that  number  was  to  them  a  material  cause,  and  that 
each  unit  had  a  {leyedos  which  contributed  to  the  bulk 
of  the  thing.  But  if  the  alternative  offered  us  by 
Aristotle  is  such  a  reductio  ad  absurdum,  surely  he  has 
misunderstood  the  point  at  issue.  The  Pythagoreans 
certainly  did  not  conceive  of  number  abstractly,  but 
might  they  not  have  regarded  it  vaguely  as  the 
mystical  cause  of  things,  and  have  allowed  their 
statements  to  vacillate,  after  the  manner  of  mystics, 
between  assertions  that  things  are  reflexions  of  number, 
and  bolder  proclamations  that  things  are  number  itself? 
Aristotle  certainly  assigns  to  them  both  doctrines 
indiscriminately1,  without  any  consciousness  that  the 
two  views  are  mutually  destructive.  If  the  Pythago- 
reans did  make  use  of  both  forms  indifferently  (and  we 
have  no  reason  to  doubt  it),  then  Aristotle  is  assuredly 
mistaken  in  classing  them  as  materialists.  By  far  the 
more  natural  supposition  is  that  their  vague  and 
mystical  modes  of  expression  were  to  him  incompre- 
hensible, and  the  simplest  solution  for  him  was  to  set 
them  down  as  materialists,  although  on  this  hypothesis 
the  extension  of  their  doctrine  to  immaterial  things  was 
a  source  of  constant  irritation.  The  fact  that  the 
symbolical  element  and  the  doctrine  of  yui^ai^  did 
undoubtedly  play  their  part  in  the  Pythagorean 
system  seems  to  me  to  make  it  almost  certain  that 
the  Pythagoreans  were  mystics  rather  than  philo- 
sophers. 

This  conclusion  appears  to  me  still  more  likely  when 
one  considers  the  subordinate  clause  of  Pythagoreanism, 
1  See  Met.  A.  5.  985  b  27 ;  987  b  11. 


RELATION  TO  THE  PLATONIC  IDEAS      101 

viz.,  that  the  odd  and  the  even,  being  the  constituents 
of  number,  are  the  constituents  of  all  existing  things. 
Since  all  existence  has  its  source  in  the  antagonism 
of  opposites,  whatever  object  we  may  care  to  consider 
is  to  be  regarded  as  a  composition  of  the  opposing 
forces  of  odd  and  even.  Now  here  we  have  the 
popular  notion  of  the  contradictions  of  life,  which 
recurs  in  Heracleitus'  yeveats  e£  ivaprccov,  brought 
into  line  with  the  empirical  division  of  number  into 
odd  and  even.  There  are  two  sides,  said  Alcmaeon, 
to  most  things  in  life ;  there  is  the  finite  and  the 
infinite,  good  and  evil,  male  and  female,  right  and  left, 
rest  and  motion.  Number,  too,  the  essence  of  things, 
has  two  phases,  the  odd  and  the  even ;  hence  it  must 
be  that  the  antitheses  of  existing  things  are  but 
variant  forms  of  the  ultimate  antithesis  of  odd  and 
even.  But  this  odd  and  even  are  also  said  by  Aristotle1 
to  have  been  regarded  by  the  Pythagoreans  as  material 
elements.  This  view  seems  at  first  sight  to  be  even 
harder  to  justify  than  the  preceding;  yet  the  explana- 
tion becomes  perfectly  easy  when  once  we  suppose 
Aristotle  to  be  understanding  mystical  and  semi- 
religious  formulae  in  a  literal  sense.  Number  once 
exalted  as  the  mystical  basis  of  things,  nothing  is  more 
natural  than  that  its  fundamental  division  into  odd  and 
even  should  be  regarded  as  the  mystical  origin  of  all 
the  multitudinous  antitheses  of  existing  things.  If 
number  works  good  or  ill  according  as  it  be  lucky  or 
unlucky,  odd  or  even,  and  if  number  is,  somehow,  the 
reality  of  things  themselves,  then  assuredly  the  good 

1  e.g.  Met.  N.  3.  1091 a  15. 


102         THE   PYTHAGOREAN   'ApiOfiol   AND   THEIR 

qualities  of  things  must  be  caused  by  oddness,  the  bad 
qualities  by  evenness,  in  number. 

Finally,  if  one  views  the  Pythagoreans  as  mystics 
rather  than  philosophers,  one  has  no  difficulty  in  the 
fact  that  their  scheme  took  account  of  immaterial,  as 
well  as  material,  phenomena.  The  mystic  is  not  con- 
cerned to  make  distinctions  of  this  sort.  The  smaller 
the  barrier  set  up  between  spiritual  and  material  the 
better  for  his  purpose.  A  theory  that  is  based  on 
fancy  and  dogma  does  not  need  to  be  tested  by 
philosophical  distinctions. 

Before  passing  on  to  the  consideration  of  Plato,  we 
have  to  note  that  although  the  original  idea  of  Pytha- 
goreanism  probably  had  its  source  in  the  Orient,  the 
members  of  the  school  apparently  worked  it  out  in 
detail  according  to  their  own  methods,  relying  chiefly 
on  superficial  analogies.  "  The  Pythagoreans,"  says 
Aristotle  at  A.  5.  985  b  27,  "  believed  that  they  detected 
in  numbers  certain  resemblances  (ofMOLco/xara)  to 
existing  and  phenomenal  things,"  and  immediately 
afterwards :  "  Phenomena  indeed  appeared  to  them 
to  be  copied  from  (dcj)cofioi(oa-6ac)  numbers/'  The 
reasons  given  by  later  commentators  for  their  choice 
of  particular  numbers  for  particular  things  are  fanciful 
enough.  Some  of  them  may  also,  as  Aristotle  indicates, 
have  had  recourse  to  the  absurd  tactics  of  Eurytus  in 
order  to  arrive  at  the  numbers  of  material  objects. 
These  details  are  of  slight  importance ;  they  only  go 
to  show  that  the  school  soon  lost  what  serious  scientific 
interest  it  had  possessed.  The  main  result  of  our 
enquiry  is  that  the  Pythagoreans  were  not  in  the  strict 
sense  philosophers,  that  they  upheld  number,  in  a  vague 


RELATION    TO   THE   PLATONIC   IDEAS  103 

and  mystical  way,  as  the  source  from  which  all  things 
proceeded,  and  that  the  obscure  and  indefinite  form  of 
their  statements,  and  the  indiscriminate  application  of 
their  theory  to  material  and  spiritual  things  alike, 
show  that  they  had  not  any  exact  knowledge  of  the 
nature  either  of  number  or  of  form. 

Our  next  task  is  to  compare  this  doctrine  with 
the  numbers  of  Plato,  and  to  estimate  the  difference 
between  them.  That  Plato  was  steeped  in  Pythago- 
rean fancy,  and  extremely  familiar  with  Pythagorean 
teaching,  cannot  be  doubted  by  those  who  are  ac- 
quainted with  his  dialogues.  Their  cardinal  doctrines 
of  the  transmigration  of  souls,  and  of  the  destruction 
and  reconstruction  of  the  world  in  definite  periods, 
appear  again  and  again  in  his  works.  He  is  constantly 
referring  to  them  and  adducing  them  as  authorities  on 
matters  that  appertain  to  mathematics.  That  a  great 
gulf,  however,  yawned  between  their  system  and  his 
cannot  but  appear  when  one  recalls  the  highly 
developed  mathematical  theory  that  was  put  forward 
in  the  last  part  of  the  Timaeus.  There  we  found  Plato1 
making  a  new  beginning,  and  pitching  his  song  in  a 
different  key.  The  greatest  part  of  his  message, 
perhaps,  had  already  been  delivered;  he  had  pro- 
claimed his  belief  in  a  universal  mind  that  is  the 
ultimate  source  of  all  phenomena.  The  dyadov,  which 
in  the  Republic  represented  the  goal  and  aim  for 
which  the  whole  creation  strives,  has  resolved  itself 
into  a  Belos  fcal  ak-qdivos  vovs,  and  the  divine  ideas, 
which  have  held  his  imagination  captive  so  long,  are 
but  certain  aspects  and  determinations  of  that  Reason. 

1  Tim.  c.  xvii.  p.  47  e. 


104         THE    PYTHAGOREAN    'ApiO/jLol   AND   THEIR 

But    the    dya06i>,  with  Plato,  was  not  to  be  a  mere 
hypothesis ;    it    was    to   be    known    and   realised ;    it 
was  the  goal  of  all  knowledge.     How  then  is  he  to 
attain  to  it  ?     How  is  he  to  prepare  himself  to  come 
into  relations  with  the  irapaheiyfjua  of  all   existence  ? 
He    can  only  begin,   as   the  Republic  suggested   long 
before,   with    the    world   of    phenomena   around    him, 
the  world  which  he  perceives  through  acaOrjai^ — that 
perverted  mode  of  apprehension  which  belongs  to  the 
animal  kind  alone,  and  which  is  the  inevitable  conse- 
quence of  the  deliberate  degeneration   of  souls,   and 
their  transmigration   through   endless  ages  into  ever- 
varying  forms  of  life.     Starting,  then,  with  the  world 
of  sense,  Plato  endeavours  to  rise  from  the  perception 
of  body  to  an  intermediate  class  of  ideas  which  will 
serve  as  objects  of  knowledge  until  the  supreme  vov?  is 
within  reach.     In  order  to  describe  these  ideas,  he  is 
forced  to  delineate  an  entirely  new  conception,  that  of 
abstract  space,  the  viroSo^rj  yeveaeax;,  within  which  he 
builds    up    mentally   the    things    of  time    and    space, 
conceived  in  terms  of  their  geometrical  construction. 
He  shows  us  that  all  the  perceptible  objects  of  the 
world  around  us  are  only  perceived   subject    to  con- 
ditions of  geometrical  relation1,  and  that   the   exact 
expression  of  these  varying  relations  is    the   highest 
mental    interpretation    of    the    things    they    denote. 
The  mind  translates  into  its  own  terms  the  materials 
of  sense,  and  when   this  happens  we  are  journeying 
from  the  material  towards  the   ideal.     All   the  phe- 
nomena  of  nature,    therefore,    may   on    this   view   be 
regarded  as  copies  of  a  mathematical  idea,  according 

1  Cf.  Laws  894  a. 


RELATION   TO   THE    PLATONIC    IDEAS  105 

to  which  a  certain  dptOfjuos  of  primary  triangular  forms 
is  supposed  to  constitute  the  characteristic  elSos  or 
shape  of  the  particular  thing. 

Now  the  first  and  obvious  distinction  to  be  drawn 
between  Plato  and  the  Pythagoreans  is  that  the  former 
considered  number,  form,  and  space,  too,  in  the  abstract 
and  not  in  the  concrete.  Number,  he  tells  us  in  the 
Parmenides1,  is  generated  as  soon  as  any  notion,  of 
whatever  kind,  comes  before  the  mind  for  consideration. 
The  mind  is  forced  to  count,  as  soon  as  it  begins  to  be 
active.  Number  is,  consequently,  of  a  subjective  nature 
only ;  it  cannot  have  an  independent  existence  apart 
from  the  thinking  mind.  As  to  form,  we  know  that  he 
had  always  in  his  mind's  eye  the  ideal  triangle  and  the 
ideal  pyramid  of  yecofjcerpta,  which,  although  they  had 
been  conceived  of  course  before  Plato's  day,  were  almost 
certainly  unknown  to  the  Pythagoreans,  whatever  later 
writers,  such  as  Proclos,  may  say  to  the  contrary.  There 
is,  at  all  events,  no  sure  or  conclusive  evidence  that  they 
had  advanced  to  a  conception  of  abstract  geometrical 
forms.  As  for  the  conception  of  pure,  abstract  space, 
it  is  extremely  doubtful  whether  any  of  Plato's  prede- 
cessors had  attained  to  such  a  clear  or  complete  notion 
of  it  as  that  which  we  find  in  the  Timaeus. 

Once  Plato  had  reached  these  highly  abstract 
conceptions,  he  could  indeed  reconstruct  the  world 
mathematically  without  any  fear  of  the  ridicule  that 
attended  the  attempts  of  the  Pythagoreans.  Anyone 
that  allowed  the  truth  and  reality  of  mental  con- 
ceptions would,  under  these  conditions,  permit  him 
to  have  dpiOfjuol  and  yet  be  sane.     It  may  be  objected 

1  Parm.  143  d,  e. 


106         THE   PYTHAGOREAN    'ApiOfiol   AND   THEIR 

that  something  of  the  mystical  element  remains  in  the 
hope,  vague  though  it  be,  that  he  may  some  day  be 
enabled,  through  a  diligent  pursuit  of  the  apiOfjboi,  to 
rise  to  the  knowledge  of  the  supreme  reality  itself. 
Such  an  aspiration  may  perhaps  be  termed  mystical, 
in  so  far  as  it  makes  an  assertion  without  affording 
visible  or  reasonable  justification,  but  if  it  be  mysticism 
at  all,  it  is  the  mysticism1  of  the  man  who  thinks,  the 
man  who  realises  and  does  not  confound,  as  the  Pytha- 
goreans did,  the  means  and  the  end.  'ApiBfiol  to  him 
are  only  a  stepping-stone.  While  pursuing  them  he 
never  loses  sight  of  the  great  reality  beyond,  which  a 
man  must  seek  icrrjaea)^  eveica  evSai/juovos  Blov. 

Let  us  endeavour,  then,  to  sum  up  the  difference 
between  the  Pythagorean  theory  and  that  of  Plato. 
Plato  inherited  from  the  Pythagorean  school  the  doctrine 
that  the  real  essence  of  a  thing  is  not  material  air, 
'earth  or  water,  as  the  case  might  be,  but  a  certain 
number,  of  which  the  thing  was,  in  some  mysterious 
and  inexplicable  way,  a  likeness.  The  only  reason 
which  the  authors  of  the  doctrine  could  give  for  their 
assumption  was  the  fact  that  they  had  fancied  certain 
resemblances  to  exist  between  number  and  things,  and 
that  they  had,  moreover,  been  astonished  at  its  efficacy 
in  their  musical  and  mathematical  experiments.  They 
could  assign  no  reasonable  basis  for  their  faith ;  they 
were  more  mystics  than  metaphysicians.  Plato,  pur- 
suing diligently  the  study  of  mathematics,  came  to 

1  Mysticism  in  this  sense  would  be  identical  with  Inge's  conception 
of  it  in  his  Christian  Mysticism — the  "  formless  speculation  "  which 
comes  to  the  aid  of  philosophy  against  materialism  and  scepticism. 
(See  Christian  Mysticism,  Lect.  i.  p.  22.) 


RELATION   TO   THE   PLATONIC   IDEAS  107 

the  same  general  conclusion,  namely,  that  number 
plays  a  great  part  in  our  experience  of  phenomena.  It 
would  have  been  unnatural  for  him,  however,  to  rest 
content  with  this  vague  generalisation.  The  severe 
discipline  to  which  he  subjected  himself  in  the  Par- 
menides,  the  Sophist,  and  kindred  dialogues,  had  made 
clear  to  him  the  nature  of  mind  and  its  mode  of 
operation.  Sensation,  with  him,  was  a  degenerate 
form  of  apprehension,  arising  from  the  body,  with 
which  the  soul  is  clogged.  It  can  never  give  accu- 
rate information  concerning  the  universe.  Sensation  \ 
told  him  that  the  universe  is  bodily ;  whereas  his  \ 
reason  knew  that  its  truest  and  highest  nature  was 
that  of  mind  and  soul.  The  philosopher  must,  however, 
begin  with  the  data  of  sensation,  for  thence  he  may,  by 
the  activity  of  pure  1/01)9,  discover  the  conditions  and 
principles  which  underlie  the  ever-varying  illusion  of 
sense.  Geometry  comes  to  his  aid  first,  and  teaches 
him  the  ultimate  laws  of  bulk  and  surface ;  then,  by 
the  help  of  pure  arithmetic,  he  is  enabled  to  express  in 
the  language  of  the  intellect  the  entire  sensible  world. 
And  this,  he  feels,  is  not  mere  imagination ;  he  is 
approaching  the  truth  of  things.  For  the  universe, 
after  all,  is  real,  and  it  is  the  only  object  of  knowledge; 
only  it  is  not  just  what  our  senses  perceive.  Therefore 
the  more  intellectual  our  account  of  it  becomes,  the 
nearer  we  are  to  knowing  it  as  it  really  is.  And 
the  individual  soul  is  a  copy  of  the  universal  irapa- 
Sevyfjia,  the  Oeco?  vovs,  though  the  resemblance  is  for 
the  present  obscured  through  the  adverse  power  of  sin. 
It  must  inevitably,  some  day,  return  to  its  first  estate, 
if  only  it  cultivates  diligently  the  activities  of  reason 


ION  THE    PYTHAGORKAN    'AptOfiol 

that  have  been  planted  within  it,  and  models  its  life 
upon  that  of  the  great  Soul  of  the  universe. 

Such  a  view  is  surely  not  unworthy  of  the  greatest 
philosopher  of  antiquity.  The  mathematical  ideas, 
with  him,  did  not,  as  with  the  Pythagoreans,  represent 
the  final  analysis  of  the  universe.  They  were  fiera^v 
ti,  an  intermediate  stage  merely,  to  prepare  the  soul 
for  the  comprehension  of  the  supreme  irapdhety^a. 
Let  us  not  set  down  to  him  the  absurd  accretions  which 
were  superimposed  upon  him  by  his  feeble  and  literal- 
minded  followers,  who,  engrossed  with  the  thought 
of  ideal  numbers  to  the  exclusion  of  all  else,  confused 
their  master's  doctrine  hopelessly  with  that  of  his 
Pythagorean  predecessors,  thereby  casting  an  un- 
merited cloud  upon  the  brilliancy  of  his  philosophical 
reputation.  For  the  Pythagoreans  were  children, 
playing  with  pebbles  upon  the  shore  of  the  vast  ocean 
of  knowledge ;  but  Plato  had  already  embarked,  with 
his  sails  full-set  for  the  open  sea. 


ESSAY   VI. 

THE  ARISTOTELIAN  CRITIQUE  OF  THE  IDEAS  AND 
NUMBERS  OF  PLATO. 

Any  account  of  the  Platonic  system,  particularly  in 
its  maturer  form,  would  be  imperfect  without  some 
reference  to  the  Metaphysics  of  Aristotle  ;  for  in  them  is 
to  be  found  the  only  contemporary  evidence  extant 
respecting  the  nature  of  Plato's  doctrine  at  a  time 
when  he  himself  had  ceased  to  commit  his  thoughts 
to  writing.  To  ignore  them  entirely  would,  indeed, 
be  a  serious  error,  when  one  considers  that  a  man's 
published  work  is  not  always  the  most  accurate 
representation  of  his  mature  conclusions,  but  that 
his  ultimate  views  are  often  reserved  for  the  inner 
circle  of  friends  or  pupils,  who  may,  if  they  will, 
record  them  after  his  death.  Objection  is  frequently 
made  to  the  testimony  of  Aristotle  in  this  connexion 
on  the  ground  of  his  personal  antipathy  to  the  idealist 
point  of  view,  and  the  consequent  unfairness,  not  only 
of  his  criticism,  but  of  his  statement,  of  Plato's  teaching. 
This,  however,  is  not  sufficient  reason  to  deter  us  from 
interrogating  Aristotle  as  far  as  we  can,  provided  we 
assess  his  evidence  at  our  own  valuation.     When  all 


110  THE    ARISTOTELIAN    CRITIQUE    OF 

due  allowance  is  made  for  the  philosophical  bias  of 
the  witness,  there  will  surely  remain  a  residuum  of 
information  which  will  contribute  something  to  the 
discovery  of  the  true  state  of  affairs.  Therefore,  since 
our  aim  is  to  come  to  some  conclusions  regarding  the 
Platonic  system  itself,  our  endeavour  will  be  to  review 
the  information  with  which  Aristotle  supplies  us,  rather 
than  to  attempt  any  estimate  of  his  critical  ability, 
although  the  character  of  his  criticisms  must  necessarily 
reveal  itself,  to  some  extent,  in  the  course  of  our  examina- 
tion; also,  for  the  sake  of  clearness  and  convenience, 
his  account  of  the  Platonic  system  in  general  should 
claim  our  attention  before  the  detailed  exposition  of 
the  numbers  in  Books  M  and  N,  and  in  other  isolated 
passages. 

Following  Aristotle's  frequent  statement1,  then,  we 
find  that  the  ideal  theory,  as  originally  conceived, 
before  it  became  connected  with  the  nature  of  numbers, 
was  promulgated  as  a  complementary  article  to  the 
Heracleitean  doctrine  of  flux.  Its  supporters  were 
convinced  that  if  there  was  to  be  eiriarr)p,r)  or  (frpovrjo-K; 
of  any  kind,  there  must  be  existences,  other  than  peovra, 
endued  with  the  permanency  in  which  these  were 
lacking ;  and  whereas  Socrates,  intent  on  morality  and 
ethics,  was  content  to  seek  this  knowledge  in  the  defini- 
tions of  general  notions  merely,  which  definitions  were 
obtained  through  peovra,  Plato  and  his  followers  posited 
certain  permanent  existences  separate  from  peovra 
(Xoopto-rd),  which  they  termed  ideas,  and  of  which,  as 
distinguished  from  peovra,  the  definition  was  given. 
The  consequence  was  that  they  supposed  ideas  to  exist 

1  Met.  A.  6.  987  a  29  seq. ;   Met.  M.  4.  1078  b  9;  9.  1086*  35. 


THE  IDEAS  AND  NUMBERS  OF  PLATO      111 

of  every  general  predicate,  after  the  fashion  of  a  man 
who,  in  making  a  calculation,  believes  it  easier  to  count  a 
larger  number  than  a  smaller  one ;  and  the  relation  which 
obtained  between  these  ideas  and  peovra  they  termed 
fjbWe^L*;1.  These,  of  course,  are  the  ideas  as  described  in 
the  Republic  and  Phaedo,  where  they  are  assumed  for 
the  express  purpose  of  clearing  up  the  mystery  of  pre- 
dication, and  they  meet  with  the  same  objection  (that 
of  the  rpiros  av6  pwiros;)  from  Aristotle  that  Plato  him- 
self urges  against  them  in  the  Parmenides.  But,  apart 
from  that,  Aristotle  continues,  the  doctrine  is  very 
unsatisfactory,  because,  in  the  first  place,  the  argu- 
ments used  by  the  Idealists  do  not  carry  conviction, 
and,  in  the  second,  their  contentions  result  in  our 
having  ideas  of  things  for  which  we  do  not  recognise 
ideas.  The  latter  criticism  is  justified  by  references  to 
dialogues  in  which  are  given  the  accounts  that  conflict 
with  the  orthodox  system.  Thus,  if  one  accepts  their 
arguments  regarding  the  sciences,  there  will  be  an  idea 
for  every  science  (cf.  Rep.  476  e);  according  to  their 
explanation  of  the  ev  eirl  iroWcov,  there  will  be  an  idea 
for  all  negations  (Rep.  596  a);  also,  in  virtue  of  the 
possibility  of  votjo-ls  concerning  things  dead,  we  must 
accept  ideas  of  (f>0aprd  (Parm.  132  B,  c).  But  orthodox 
Platonists  apparently  do  not  have  ideas  of  these  things. 
Moreover,  the  most  accurate  expositions  postulate  ideas 
of  relations2,  of  which  we  present-day  Platonists  refuse 
to  admit  ideas,  and  in  another  case  the  rpiro^  avOpwiro^ 
argument  itself  is  brought  against  the  ideal  theory. 
Another  inconsistency  is  found  in  the  fact  that,  whereas 

1  Met.  A.  6.  987  b  9. 

2  Phaedo  74  a.  »  Parm.  132  a. 


112  THE    ARISTOTELIAN    CRITIQUE   OF 

the  Platonic  teaching  makes  the  ideas  responsible  for 
yeveais  of  any  kind,  there  is  yeveats  of  some  things,  such 
as  SatcrvXtos  and  oUta1,  of  which  the  Platonists  say 
there  are  no  ideas.  The  Plato  whom  Aristotle  knew 
apparently  claimed  ideas  of  natural  objects  only,  such 
as  Trvp,  crap!;,  /cecfxiXr/  (Sib  Br)  ov  tca/co)?  6  UXdroyv  e(f>r}2 
on  elhrj  iarlv  oiroaa  cfrvaei,,  elirep  eanv  elhrj.,.olov  irvp, 
cap!;,  K€(j)a\7]),  and  these  ideas  were  pre-eminently  of  a 
numerical  nature,  composed  of  the  same  <jToiyelaz  as 
visible  things,  viz.,  the  ev  and  the  dopccTos  Sua?,  or, 
to  fxeya  teal  to  fiucpov.  Hence  the  absurdity  of  those 
accounts  which  posit  ideas  of  a  multitude  of  things,  for, 
according  to  these,  number,  and  not  the  dyad,  is  first 
in  importance,  and  the  darling  theory  of  the  Platonists 
is  overthrown. 

Such,  in  brief,  is  the  substance  of  the  rambling 
sketch  given  by  Aristotle,  and  the  writer  of  Books  M 
and  N,  of  the  Platonic  system  in  general.  Disjointed  as 
it  is,  however,  it  furnishes  us  with  several  conclusions 
regarding  Aristotle's  relation  to  the  Platonic  teaching. 
In  the  first  place,  he  certainly  was  not  aware  of  any 
single  harmonious  theory  in  which  all  the  statements 
in  the  dialogues,  written  at  different  periods  in  Plato's 
career,  were  to  be  reconciled.  On  the  contrary,  the 
dialogues  furnish  him  with  constant  occasion  for 
discontent;  they  contradict  one  another,  and  militate 
for  the  most  part  against  the  received  Platonism  of 
the  day.  Aristotle,  therefore,  did  not  hold,  with  certain 
modern  critics,  that  the  ideal  theory  was  a  single  con- 
ception that  remained  essentially  the  same  throughout. 

1  Met.  M.  5.  1080  a  5.  2  Met.  A.  3.  1070 a  18. 

3  Met.  A.  6.  988 a  11. 


THE   IDEAS   AND   NUMBERS   OF   PLATO  113 

Secondly,  he  speaks  as  one  who  has  read  the  dialogues 
for  himself,  as  a  self-imposed  task,  without  any 
illuminating  aid  from  the  one  who  wrote  them.  They 
are  a  problem  which  he  does  not  seem  able  to  solve. 
Clearly,  then,  Aristotle  could  not  at  any  time  have  had 
the  advantage  of  hearing  Plato  himself  lecture  on  the 
subject  of  the  dialogues;  he  could  not  have  known 
the  ideal  theory  at  first  hand  during  its  various 
developments.  By  the  time  he  came  to  the  Academy 
the  theory  must  have  suffered  material  alteration,  and 
apparently  no  great  pains  were  taken  to  make  the  later 
phase  consonant  with  the  former.  All  Plato's  strictly 
philosophical  dialogues  wrere  probably  already  written, 
and  his  work  lay  chiefly  in  discoursing  personally  to 
his  pupils  on  the  subject  of  the  ideas  as  apiQyioi — so 
at  least  one  gathers  from  the  numerous  references1 
to  the  aypacjya  Soy/jbara  and  aypacfroi,  avvovcriai  made 
by  Aristotle  and  later  writers.  At  any  rate,  it  is  the 
dpiO/jLol  that  loom  largest  on  Aristotle's  horizon ;  the 
Platonists  of  his  day  devoted  themselves  to  them  alone, 
and  schism  even  arose  in  their  ranks  on  account  of 
their  conflicting  views  regarding  them.  It  is  quite 
natural,  therefore,  that  Aristotle,  being  steeped  in  the 
contemporary  views  of  the  school,  should  display  con- 
siderable ignorance  regarding  the  evolution  of  Plato's 
thought  during  the  interval  between  the  Phaedo  and 
the  Timaeus,  and  should  fail  to  realise  the  value  of 
that  deliberative  and  corrective  process  which  we  have 
examined  in  previous  essays.  That  the  ideal  theory  was 
not  in  the  beginning  identical  with  its  latest  phase,  he 
assures  us;  but  of  the  intervening  stages  he  knows 
1  See  Ar.  Phys.  A.  2.  209  b  15  ;  Procl.  in  Tim.  p.  205. 
W.  8 


1  14  THE    ARISTOTELIAN   CRITIQUE   OF 

nothing.  But,  although  we  may  be  disposed  to  regard 
him  as  a  dubious  authority  on  the  ideal  theory  at  large, 
we  cannot  rob  him  of  his  importance  as  a  contemporary 
student  of  Platonism,  when  we  are  examining  the  latest 
stage  of  that  theory. 

This  so-called  number-theory,  as  described  by 
Aristotle,  is  so  full  of  difficulty,  and  the  dissensions 
among  its  supporters  are  of  so  intricate  a  nature,  that 
a  complete  examination  of  the  evidence  is  necessary 
before  one  can  hope  to  disentangle  the  views  of  Plato 
from  those  of  his  successors;  and  for  this  purpose  it 
will  be  wiser  to  postpone  the  consideration  of  the 
condensed  and  confused  statements  of  Book  A  till  we 
have  weighed  the  more  detailed  accounts  of  Books  M 
and  N.  The  author  of  M  and  N,  writing  perhaps  more 
as  a  Platonist  than  as  Plato's  contemporary,  describes  at 
great  length  the  conflicting  tenets  of  the  Platonists  of 
his  day.  There  were,  apparently,  at  least  three  different 
sections 1  among  the  Platonists  of  that  time,  one  school 
postulating  the  existence  of  two  kinds  of  numbers,  the 
ideal  and  the  mathematical,  which  were  widely  different, 
although  alike  yjapiGTa,  another  affirming  that  /jLaOrj/jba- 
rt/ca  and  ISeat  are  one  nature,  and  that  the  Iheat  find 
expression  in  mathematical  terms,  and  yet  a  third,  who, 
according  to  M.  1086  a  2  and  N.  1090  a  17,  discarded  ideas 
altogether,  and  sought  refuge  in  fxad^/jLariKa  simply, 
declaring,  like  the  Pythagoreans,  that  things  are  really 
numbers. 

The  first  of  these  theories  is  a  complicated  one2,  for 
these  Platonists  believe  that  the  ideal,  as  opposed  to  the 

i  See  M.  1.  1076  a  16  ff. ;     M.  8.  1083  a  21  ff . ;     M.  9.  1086  a  2  ff . ; 
N.  3.  1090b16ff. 

2  See  M.  6.  1080a15ff. 


THE   IDEAS   AND    NUMBERS   OF    PLATO  115 

mathematical,  numbers,  differ  one  from  the  other  in 
quality,  and  are  do-vfjiftXrjToi,  i.e.,  no  mathematical 
operations,  either  of  addition  or  multiplication,  can 
take  place  in  regard  to  them.  Whereas  mathematical 
numbers  are  formed  by  the  addition  of  a  plurality  of 
units,  all  of  equal  value,  the  units  of  ideal  numbers  are 
in  each  case  distinct,  and  cannot  enter  into  combination 
with  those  of  other  ideal  numbers.  This  at  least  seems 
to  Aristotle  the  most  plausible  explanation  of  the  word 
do-vfifiXrjTos,  though  he  acknowledges  that  it  may  be 
construed  to  mean  that  even  the  monads  of  each  ideal 
number  itself,  if  it  has  any,  are  not  to  be  added  to  one 
another,  in  which  case,  of  course,  the  ideas  of  number 
will  not  have  the  properties  of  number  at  all.  It  is 
hard  to  believe,  as  Aristotle  justly  points  out,  that 
there  can  exist  a  number  which  is  not  to  be  formed  by 
the  addition  or  multiplication  of  units ;  and,  on  the 
other  view  of  ao-u/x/3\?;  to  9,  it  would  seem  necessary  to 
make,  not  only  the  monads,  but  the  triads,  pentads,  and 
all  the  other  constituents  of  the  numbers,  to  be 
dav/jLfiXrjToi  as  well — a  truly  complicated  task  (M.  7. 
1082  a  1  seq.).  The  first  doctrine,  then,  is  characterised 
by  ideas  of  number,  which  are  ranked  in  a  qualitative 
order  (rov  fxev  eyovra  to  nrporepov  ical  varepov  rds 
l&eas,  M.  1080 b  12),  together  with  mathematical 
number,  apart  from  the  ideas  and  alaOrjrd.  These 
ideas  are  generally  styled  irpoyroi  dpcOfiol1,  in  con- 
tradistinction to  the  numbers  of  the  second  school, 
and  are  not  made  to  consist,  like  the  ideas  of  the  second 
school,  of  the  ev  and  the  indefinite  dyad  (see  N.  3. 1090  b 
34  :  cf  M.  8.  1083  a  32).  Mathematical  number,  more- 
1  See  M.  7.  1081  a  4,  21. 

8—2 


116  THE   ARISTOTELIAN   CRITIQUE   OF 

over,  was  regarded  by  them  as  jiera^v  rod  elhrjrucov  fcal 
rov  alaOrjrov,  holding  the  same  position  as  the  /jlclOt)- 
jjuari/cd  of  the  Republic,  except  that  it  is  now  considered 
to  be  something  between  ideal  and  material  number 
exclusively.  The  old  multitude  of  ideas,  representing 
everything  which  can  be  predicated  of  anything,  have 
dropped  into  the  background,  and  the  ideal  numbers  are 
the  only  ideas,  and,  in  virtue  of  being  ideal  numbers,  are 
also  the  ideas  of  material  things.  Such,  at  least,  seems 
to  be  the  necessary  inference  from  the  discussion  in 
M.  8.  1084 ab,  where  the  avrol  dpiOfiol,  or  ideal,  as 
distinguished  from  ordinary,  numbers,  are  certainly 
referred  to  (1084  a  19,  23),  and  it  is  implied  that  each 
of  the  avrol  dptOfjuol  stands  for  the  idea  of  an  animal  or 
the  like.  There  it  is  also  hinted  that  the  ideal  series 
ends  with  the  Se/ca?,  but  this  is  not  advanced  as  a 
compulsory  part  of  the  creed. 

Opposed  to  the  Platonists,  who  posit  the  two  classes 
of  numbers,  is  the  school  (least  commendable  of  all,  says 
Aristotle1)  who  say  that  the  ev  is  the  dp^rj  and  aroiyelov 
of  all  things,  and  that  by  its  combination  with  the  8vd<; 
dopurTos2  number  is  produced.  These  apparently  agree 
wTith  the  former  school  in  making  numbers  ^topiard, 
but  their  numbers  are  not,  like  the  ideal  numbers  of 
the  first  school,  dav/ji^Xrjrot.  They  saw  the  folly  of 
having  two  distinct  sets  of  number,  and  their  contention 
seems  to  have  been3  that  the  ideas  took  the  form  of 
numbers,  or  were  expressible  in  numbers,  for  they 
refused  to  agree  with  the  more  Pythagorising  section 
that  numbers  are  in  themselves  ovcrta4.  They  seemed 
to  justify  their  position  by  their  speculative  analysis, 

1  M.  8.  1083  b  2.  2  M.  6.  1080  b  6. 

3  M.  9.  1086  a  7.  4  M.  9.  1086  a  2;  N.  3.  1090  b  17. 


THE  IDEAS  AND  NUMBERS  OF  PLATO      117 

not  only  of  number,  but  of  all  /juadrj/jbaTL/cd.  After 
generating  number  out  of  the  ev  and  the  dopuaro^ 
Svds,  they  proceeded  to  generate  /meyedo^  out  of  number 
and  v\r),  or  ^iwpa1,  in  virtue  of  their  resolution  of  the 
solid  into  4,  the  surface  into  3,  the  line  into  2,  and  so  on. 
They  are  also  represented2  as  in  some  instances  generat- 
ing the  various  aspects  of  fxeyeOo?  out  of  varieties  of 
the  dopLaros  Sua?,  or  to  /jueya  kcli  to  yaKpov,  which  is 
the  ultimate  basis  of  number  and  all  things. 

The  third  section,  who,  fearful  of  the  hvayepeta2,  that 
beset  the  ideas  in  general,  took  refuge  in  fiadrjfjLaTt/cd 
alone,  seem  to  have  been  infected  with  the  taint  of 
Pythagoreanism,  though  apparently  they  did  not  go  so 
far  as  to  make  numbers  a  material  cause,  as  Aristotle 
would  put  it  (M.  1.  1076  a  35).  They  did  not  indulge, 
like  their  contemporaries,  in  the  speculative  analysis  of 
number  into  the  ev  and  the  dopiaTos  Svds ;  but  they 
are  represented  instead  as  evolving  all  number  from 
the  addition  or  multiplication  of  eV4. 

Now  it  is  at  once  obvious  that  of  the  three  theories 
the  first  is  by  far  the  most  complicated,  inasmuch  as 
it  is  at  pains  to  draw  fine  distinctions  between  the 
el&rjTi/col  and  the  /iadrj/juaTL/col  dpcd/Liol,  and  applies 
different  phraseology  to  the  two  kinds.  The  eiBrjrifcol 
dpc0fjLol  are  7rpa)T0t  aptO/uoc,  and  are  incapable  of 
mathematical  operation  of  any  sort,  whereas  the 
fiaOrj/jLaTLtcd  are  /jueTa^v,  and  are  subject  to  mathe- 
matical calculation.  The  upholders  of  this  view, 
moreover,  did  not  seem  to  endorse  the  theory  of 
number  as  being  compounded  of  the  ev  and  the 
dopiaTos  Sua?;    they  seem,  in  fact,  to  have  left    the 

1  N.  3.  1090  b  21.  2  M.  9.  1085  *  9.         3  M.  9.  1086  a  3. 

4  M.  8.1083*21. 


118  THE   ARISTOTELIAN   CRITIQUE   OF 

details  of  their  theory  unexplained,  not  even  trying  to 
give  an  account  of  the  fjuaOrj/jLart/col  dpiOfioi1.  We  may, 
however,  draw  several  inferences  regarding  this  section 
of  the  Platonic  school.  The  fact  that  fjuadrj/jbartKa,  on 
this  view  of  the  numbers,  are  almost  always  termed 
/jL€rai;v,  has  already  led  Prof.  Cook  Wilson2  to  infer  that 
the  ideas  of  number  referred  to  here  are  identical  with 
the  earlier  doctrine  of  the  Republic.  While  allowing 
that  the  discussion  of  fxaO^fianKa  in  Book  B,  and 
perhaps  a  few  other  passages,  may  refer  to  the  theory 
of  the  Republic  alone,  I  believe  that  the  details 
concerning  the  davfjLfiXrjTot  apiOfjuol  in  M  and  N  cannot 
but  belong  to  the  late  theory  of  numbers,  which,  in  the 
hands  of  one  section  of  Platonism,  was  contaminated 
with  the  mathematical  teaching  of  the  Republic^. 
There,  it  will  be  remembered,  there  is  an  eternal  and 
immutable  idea  of  every  mathematical  notion,  besides 
the  abstract  conception  of  which  the  scientific  definition 
treats.  This  later  school  of  Platonists,  as  far  as  we 
can  judge,  took  over  this  portion  of  the  educational 
scheme  of  the  Republic,  and,  ignoring  for  the  most 
part  the  geometrical,  astronomical,  and  other  /xera^u 
(A.  9.  992 b  13),  used  it  to  explain  the  difference 
between  ideal  and  mathematical  number.  The  theory 
of  the  Republic,  however,  was  assuredly  pressed  into 
the  service  of  the  later  number-theory,  in  order,  no 
doubt,  to  afford  a  plausible  justification  for  having 
idea-numbers  at  all4.  The  davfji/3\r]Tot  dpiOfiou,  since 
each  represented  a  unique  entity,  were  ev,  and  not 
iroXkd,  and  were,  therefore,  not  subject  to  the  objection 

1  N.  3.  1090 b  34. 

2  See  Art.  by  Prof.  Cook  Wilson,  Class.  Rev.  vol.  xviii.  p.  247. 

3  Rep.  525  a  ff.  4  See  M.  7.  1081  a  6ff. 


THE   IDEAS   AND   NUMBERS   OF   PLATO  119 

raised  by  Aristotle,  that  if  any  number  could  be  an 
idea,  the  ideas  for  each  object  would  be  multitudinous. 
It  is  at  any  rate  clear  that  these  Platonists  thought 
their  ideal  numbers  to  be  the  ideas  of  things.  The 
writer  of  Book  M1,  referring  at  c.  8  to  the  Trpcoroc 
apiO/jiOL,  which  he  shows  to  be  subject  to  the  same 
absurdities  as  ordinary  apcO/iou,  gives  as  hypothetical 
instances  of  the  numbers  that  stood  for  ideas  of  things 
fj  r€Tpa<;  avrrj  and  rj  8vd$  avrrj,  thereby  showing 
clearly  that  the  supporters  of  the  irpoyrot  dptOfiol  used 
them  to  express  the  reality  of  visible  things.  In 
common  with  the  rest  of  the  school,  they  held  that 
number  was  the  highest  expression  of  reality,  but  it 
was  not  mathematical,  but  ideal,  number  that  was  so 
distinguished. 

To  this  section  of  the  school,  undoubtedly,  belongs 
that  curious  article  of  belief  which  Aristotle  attributes 
to  the  Platonists  in  the  sixth  chapter  of  the  first  book 
of  his  Ethics2.  The  later  Platonists,  he  says,  did  not 
admit  the  existence  of  an  idea  to  correspond  to  a  group 
of  things  whose  members  were  in  the  relation  oiirporepov 
zeal  varepov  to  one  another  (i.e.,  they  did  not  accept  the 
doctrine  of  the  Republic  in  toto,  and  allow  an  idea  of 
every  predicate),  and,  consequently,  did  not  recognise  a 
single  idea  of  number  to  correspond  to  the  group  of  ideal 
numbers,  which  were  in  the  relation  of  irporepov  /ecu 
varepov  to  one  another.  These  Platonists,  in  short, 
utilised  a  part  only  of  the  machinery  of  the  ideal  theory 
of  the  Republic.  The  assumption  of  an  idea  for  every 
predicate  was  for  them  unnecessary,  since  the  logic  of  pre- 
dication, thanks  to  Plato's  dialectical  zeal  as  exemplified 

1  M.  8.  1084 a  23  seq.  2  Eth.  N.  i.  vi.  1096  R  17. 


120  THE    ARISTOTELIAN    CRITIQUE   OF 

in  the  Parmenides,  the  Sophist,  and  elsewhere,  was  not 
to  them  a  mystery,  such  as  it  had  been  to  the  Eleatic 
Zeno  and  his  contemporaries.  They  retained  apparently 
ideas  of  numbers  only,  and  these  ideas  had  the  pre- 
eminent virtue  of  representing  the  reality  of  all  existing 
things ;  and,  although  they  constituted  an  ideal  series, 
they  were  to  be  exempt  from  the  original  rule  that 
every  group  of  particulars  has  an  idea  corresponding 
to  it. 

The  second  class  of  Platonists  did  not  feel  com- 
pelled to  have  recourse  to  these  shifts  for  main- 
taining the  doctrine  of  the  ideas  as  numbers.  There 
did  not  seem  to  them  to  be  any  absurdity  in  supposing 
that  the  ideas  should  be  represented  as  ordinary  dptO/jLoc, 
and  that  the  highest  expression  of  the  reality  of  the 
universe  was  to  be  found  in  mathematical  formulae. 
They  laid  great  stress  on  the  derivation  of  number  from 
the  ev  and  the  dopicrTos  Svds,  which  were  the  arot^eia, 
not  merely  of  number,  but  of  all  existing  things.  In 
fact,  it  was  in  virtue  of  thus  containing  in  their  essence 
the  elements  to  which  all  existing  things  must 
ultimately  be  reduced,  that  numbers  were  marked 
out  by  them  as  the  ideal  prototypes  of  things.  Of 
these  two  GToiyela,  it  is  the  unit  that  is  the  aToiy/lov 
par  excellence,  since  it  furnishes  ovaia  to  the  number 
that  is  generated,  whereas  the  indefinite  dyad  acts  as 
the  vXrj  or  8vva/j,L<;.  The  statements  made  regarding 
this  latter  mysterious  conception  are  somewhat  vague, 
and  not  always  consistent,  and  it  would  appear  that  the 
Platonists  held  varying  beliefs  regarding  it.  In  general, 
however,  it  may  be  said  that  it  is  the  potentiality  of 
quantity,  of  excess  and  defect.     Some  of  the  schools 


THE    IDEAS   AND    NUMBERS    OF    PLATO  121 

called  it  Svottolo?1,  that  which  duplicates  whatever 
it  operates  upon,  rov  yap  7ro\\d  rd  ovra  elvac  alria 
avrrj?  rj  (frvcrts2;  and  Simplicius  adds:  tcaOo  yap  Sua?  icrrt, 
ttXtjOos  teal  oXiyoTTjra  Xaj(ev  ev  eavrf)*  icaOo  fjuev  to 
8t7r\dai6v  icrnv,  ev  avrfj  7r\rj0os.../ca06  Se  rjpnav 
6\iy6rr)Ta3.  This  tenet,  however,  was,  I  believe,  the 
result  of  a  misconception  regarding  the  origin  of  the 
term  Svds,  as  will  appear  later.  The  ordinary  phrase  for 
the  Svds,  applied,  we  are  told,  in  the  first  instance  by 
Plato,  was  to  [xeya  icaX  to  /jatcpov,  but  some  Platonists  pre- 
ferred to  call  it  by  the  general  name  ttXtjOo^]  whereas 
others  chose  to  employ  a  variant  of  the  original  fieya 
teal  fxiKpov  which  seemed  to  them  to  be  more  appropriate 
to  the  nature  of  the  Svds,  viz.,  to  virepeyov  icai  to 
virepeyop.evov 5. 

The  third,  Pythagorising,  school  need  not  detain  us 
long.  Dropping  all  compromise,  they  maintained  boldly 
that  things  are  numbers.  To  them  possibly  belonged 
Xenocrates 6,  who,  interpreting  p.  35  A  of  the  Timaeus, 
affirmed  that  the  generation  of  the  soul  out  of  the 
d/jLepcaTos  and  the  fxepiaTrj  ovaia  was  simply  the 
generation  of  number  out  of  ev  and  7r\f}0os,  and  that 
the  soul  was  therefore  only  a  number  that  moved  itself ; 
and  if  we  are  to  believe  the  account  of  Met  N.  5.  1092 b 
8  ff.,  there  must  have  been  very  little  to  choose  between 
them  and  the  Pythagoreans. 

It  is  now  time  to  turn  to  the  consideration  of  the  con- 
fused statements  in  Book  A,  with  a  view  to  determining 

1  M.  7.  1082  a  14 ;  M.  8.  1083  b  36. 

2  M.  8.  1083  a  14.       8  Simp#  in  Ar>  Phys,  104  B. 

4  N.  1.  1087  b  30.       5  N.  1.  1087  b  18. 

6  Ar.  de  An.  A.  4.  408  b  32 ;  Plutarch,  irepl  rrjs  ev  Ti/xaiy  \pv\oyov las 
c.  2. 


122  THE   ARISTOTELIAN    CRITIQUE   OF 

how  much  of  this  number-doctrine  can  be  legitimately 
fathered  upon  Plato,  who  is  there  said  to  have  originated 
it.  After  various  details  regarding  the  ideas  as  origin- 
ally described  in  the  Phaedo  and  Republic ,  we  are  told 
that1  Plato  regarded  the  /jlclOt}  pari  tea  as  being  fxera^v 
roiv  irpay/jiaTcov,  and  apparently  at  the  same  time  held 
that,  since  the  eiSrj  are  the  causes  of  peovra,  their 
aToiyela  must  accordingly  be  the  GToiyela  of  existing 
things  also ;  and  these  GToiyela  were  two,  &>?  /xev  ovv 
vXrjv  to  fieya  /ecu  to  /ju/cpov  elvai  dpyd<$9  go?  S'  ovcriav 
to  ev.  This  statement,  on  the  face  of  it,  proves  that  the 
writer  was  not  careful  to  distinguish  the  different  stages 
of  Platonic  doctrine.  How  could  a  belief  in  /jiaOrj/jiaTi/cd 
as  fi€Ta%v  between  ideas  and  sensibles  be  held  in  con- 
junction with  the  doctrine  that  ideas  are  numbers 
composed  of  numerical  GToiyela  ?  Our  investigation  of 
the  two  leading  doctrines  described  in  M  and  N  showed 
us  that  the  two  positions  were  quite  incompatible, 
inasmuch  as  the  first  school  made  their  numbers 
davfjb^XrjTOi,  whereas  the  latter  made  no  such  condi- 
tion. A  further  confusion,  moreover,  is  to  be  found 
in  the  phrase  to  pueya  /ecu  to  fju/cpbv  elvai  dp^ds. 
According  to  N.  1.  1087  b  14,  the  view  that  made  to 
fjueya  Kal  to  /ju/epbv  two  separate  dpxal  belonged  to  a 
very  late  sect  of  Plato's  followers,  and  could  not  with 
accuracy  be  ascribed  to  him  at  all.  The  account  of 
Plato's  doctrine  given  here  is,  therefore,  by  no  means 
clear  or  exact.  The  statement,  however,  that  Plato 
made  the  ideas  as  numbers  to  consist  of  the  ev  and  the 
/jieya  /cal  pu/epbv  is  one  that  demands  our  attention,  for 
it  is  borne  out  by  other  passages  such  as  Physics 
T.  4.  203  a  10,  A.  2.  209  b  33.     But  since  Aristotle  is  so 

1  A.  6.  987  b  15. 


THE  IDEAS  AND  NUMBERS  OF  PLATO      123 

lacking  in  precision  concerning  the  divergences  of 
the  schools,  and  fails  so  often  to  point  out  where 
Plato  ends  and  Platonism  begins,  the  utmost  caution 
must  be  exercised  in  attributing  to  Plato  himself  any 
of  the  number-doctrines  mentioned  by  Aristotle,  even 
when  they  bear  his  name.  Only  when  we  find  con- 
firmation in  the  dialogues  themselves  can  we  with 
certainty  assume  that  Plato  himself  was  the  author  of 
any  of  these  views. 

That  Plato  in  the  Timaeus  has  given  to  fjuaOq/jbaTC/cd 
an  important  place  in  his  ideal  reconstruction  of  the 
universe  will  not  be  denied  by  those  who  have  accepted 
the  results  of  Essays  ill  and  IV.  Let  us  then  compare 
to  /jL€<ya  /cal  to  /ju/cpbv  of  Aristotle's  critique  with  the 
parallel  conception  in  Plato,  which  was  delineated  first 
in  the  Philebus  as  to  fxaXXov  t€  /cal  tjttov,  and  de- 
veloped later  into  the  x°*Pa  °f  the  Timaeus.  Plato 
began,  as  we  found  in  Essay  II,  with  a  realisation  of 
the  vast  multitude  of  antithetical  qualities  in  terms  of 
which  the  flux  of  sense  is  for  the  most  part  to  be 
expressed.  The  typical  instances  of  these  were  to 
OepjJLOTepov  /cal  yjrv^poTepov,  to  ^TjpoTepov  teal  vypoTepov, 
and  to  nel^ov  /cal  o-fitfcpoTepov,  the  comparative  degree 
marking  the  infinite  variability  of  the  attributes  them- 
selves and  of  the  flux  which  they  represented.  The 
mere  isolation  of  these  qualities,  however,  from  their 
environment  seemed  to  imply  the  existence,  tcaTa 
\6yov,  at  any  rate,  of  something  within  which  they 
arose  and  perished,  and  consequently  we  heard  of  rj  tov 
fiaXkov  t€  /cat  tjttov  ehpa,  within  which  the  antithe- 
tical qualities  found  a  home,  that  which  made  their 
existence   possible.      In    the    Timaeus   we    found    the 


124  THE   ARISTOTELIAN    CRITIQUE    OF 

conception  of  the  eSpa  still  further  developed;  Plato 
there,  in  fact,  had  sketched1  for  us  in  clear  language 
the  abstract  notion  of  space,  within  which  these 
qualities  arise,  together  with  the  objects  which  they 
compose  (to  Se  ottolovovv  ti,  Oepfiov  rj  Xev/cbv  rj  /ecu 
OTtovv  toov  evavTicov  teal  iravff  ocra  i/c  tovtcov).  Plato 
also  had  utilised  this  conception  in  order  to  give  an 
intelligible  representation  of  the  ideas  of  natural 
objects;  within  this  abstract  x^Pa  he  caused  to 
appear  the  ideal  counterparts  of  fire,  air,  earth  and 
water — geometrical  structures  composed  of  triangles 
combined  in  various  proportions,  the  highest  expres- 
sion of  the  eternal  laws  of  Becoming. 

Now  it  is  extremely  probable  that  the  phrase 
doptaros  Sua?,  so  much  used  by  Aristotle,  arose  while 
the  theory  of  space  was  taking  shape,  and  was  based 
on  the  description  in  the  Philebus,  in  which  we  are 
presented  with  the  picture  of  two  extremes  in  ever- 
varying  degrees  of  approximation  to,  and  divergence 
from,  each  other.  The  writer  of  N  practically  ac- 
knowledges this  when  he  speaks  of  rj  rov  dvlaov 
8vd$  rod  /xeyaXov  koX  /M/cpov2.  If  the  phrase  had 
originated  as  an  arithmetical  term  simply,  i.e.,  as  the 
equivalent  of  the  duplicating  force,  it  would  not  have 
been  conjoined  invariably  with  those  two  antithetical 
adjectives.  Moreover,  when  Plato's  analysis  of  matter 
developed  still  further  and  was  found  to  consist  ulti- 
mately in  the  notion  of  abstract  space,  it  is  quite 
conceivable  that  the  %oopa,  the  Svpcljulls  or  v\rj  of  size 
and  extension,  should  be  popularly  described  in  the 
school  by  the  dopiaro^  8vd<;  most  appropriate  to  it, 
1  Tim.  50  a.  2  N.  1.  1087  b  7. 


THE   IDEAS   AND    NUMBERS   OF    PLATO  125 

viz.,  that  of  to  jjuel^ov  tcai  afiiKporepov  or  to  fxeya  teal 
to  ixacpov ;  for  the  tendency  of  the  Timaeus  was  to 
make  all  these  sensible  qualities  but  variations  of  the 
fundamental  opposition  of  to  fieya  /cat  to  fjuicpov,  as 
the  exposition  of  61  E  ff.  particularly  shows.  The 
qualities  of  hot  and  cold,  hard  and  soft,  and  the  like, 
are  dependent  upon  the  geometrical  structure  of  the 
elements  which  produce  them ;  they  are  secondary 
effects1  of  the  primary  differences  of  shape  in  the 
elementary  figures,  and  consequently  to  fjteya  teal  to 
fjuKpov  is  the  fundamental  opposition  of  matter.  But, 
after  the  date  of  the  Timaeus,  while  the  Platonic 
number-theory  was  rapidly  developing  in  various  di- 
rections, the  phrase  to  /xiya  ical  to  fjuc/cpov  undoubtedly 
came  to  be  used  in  a  somewhat  restricted  sense,  and  in 
a  fashion  that  to  the  writer  of  M  and  N  appeared 
inaccurate.  It  was  applied  to  the  vXrj  of  apc0/u,ol  as 
such,  which  to  many  contemporary  Platonists2  seemed 
to  be  represented  better  by  the  words  to  7ro\v  ical 
to  oXiyov,  or  to  virepe-^ov  ical  to  virepeyp^vov.  Some 
indeed  repudiated  to  fxeya  ical  to  fu/epdv  altogether, 
and  substituted  the  simpler  ttXtjOos.  All,  however, 
agreed  in  making  the  ev  the  other  aToi^elov,  and  re- 
garding it  as  the  source  of  ovaia  in  the  numbers  that 
were  generated. 

Now  is  there  any  indication  that  Plato  himself  wras 
responsible  for  this  extension  of  the  phrase  to  /xeya  ical 
to  ixacpov?.  In  c.  6  of  Book  A,  previously  referred  to, 
he  is  not  only  said  to  have  employed  it  in  this  way, 
but  the  reasons  for  his  doing  so  are  given  in  a  passage 
that  abounds  in  reminiscences  of  the  Timaeus.  ''  The 
1  Cf.  M.  9.  1085  a  10.  a  N.  1.  1087  b  16  ff. 


12()  THE    ARISTOTELIAN    CRITIQUE   OF 

second  crTo^etor,"  says  Aristotle1,  "  they  made  a  dyad, 
because  the  numbers,  with  the  exception  of  the  nrpwroL 
apiOfioi  (i.e.,  the  ideas  of  numbers  advocated  by  the 
first  of  the  Platonic  sects),  were  easily  generated  out 
of  it,  as  it  were  from  an  itcfjuayelov"  "And  yet," 
Aristotle  goes  on  to  say,  "  the  Platonic  account  is  not 
in  harmony  with  facts,  for  in  actual  life  one  eZ8o<? 
generates  many  things  out  of  many  substances,  not 
from  one  v\rj,  as  the  Platonists  say;  neither  is  their 
simile  of  the  father  and  the  mother  consistent  with 
their  doctrine."  Here  we  have  obviously  the  argument 
and  the  imagery  of  Timaeus  50  A — E  reproduced  in 
a  condensed  form,  and  transferred  from  the  conception 
of  x(*>Pa>  t°  which  they  were  originally  applied,  to  that 
of  a  SvvafjLLs  of  plurality,  out  of  which,  with  the  aid  of 
the  unit,  dpidfioi  are  evolved.  Not  only,  then,  may 
we  suppose  the  existence  of  a  %oopa,  within  which  all 
manner  of  geometrical  figures  are  generated,  but  even 
the  more  select  science  of  number  must  have  as  its 
foundation  a  conception  of  an  arithmetical  vXr],  an 
arithmetical  aireipov,  from  which,  with  the  aid  of  the 
"  atomic "  unit,  the  whole  army  of  numbers  is  to  be 
created. 

This  extension  of  geometrical  terms  to  the  science 
of  number  is  by  no  means  surprising.  It  was  the 
recognised  scientific  method  of  the  day.  From  the 
first  geometry  had  been  called  into  requisition  to 
exemplify  the  technical  differences  of  number,  as  the 
mathematical  demonstration  of  the  Theaetetus2  clearly 
indicates.     If  the  square,  the  oblong  and  the  gnomon3 

1  A.  6.  987  b  33.        2  Theaet.   147  d  seq. 
3  Cf.  Ar.  Phys.  T.  4.  203  a  14. 


THE  IDEAS  AND  NUMBERS  OF  PLATO      127 

each  represented  a  mathematical  principle  which  is 
valid  for  the  science  of  number,  no  less  than  that  of 
surface,  why  should  not  the  abstract,  ideal  %w/oa, 
within  which  these  figures  arise,  also  have  its  counter- 
part in  arithmetic  ?  What  is  it  that  makes  the  gene- 
ration of  number  possible  ?  The  point,  which  forms 
the  original  basis  of  all  superficial  and  solid  figures, 
is,  in  arithmetic,  the  unit,  the  arty/jurj  aOeros1.  The 
%ftSpa,  or  the  fjueya  teal  yuKpov,  then,  of  number,  is  that 
which  provides  for  the  multiplication,  the  pluralisation 
of  the  unit,  the  vague  hvvaya^  of  amplification,  of 
quantity,  which  is  best  described  as  to  virepkyov  real 
to  vTrepe^ofievov2. 

It  is  not  at  all  incredible  that  Plato  may  have  been 
the  author  of  this  development  in  mathematical  science, 
but  it  is  more  difficult  to  believe  that  he  associated  it 
with  his  ideal  theory  of  numbers,  and  said  that  the 
mathematical  ev  and  the  doptcrTos  Svav  of  number 
were  the  <7T0£%e?a  of  the  ideas  and  all  existing  things, 
as  Aristotle  indicates.  In  Essay  IV  we  had  reason  to 
believe  that  in  the  Timaeus  he  posited  the  existence 
of  certain  mathematical  ideas — the  mathematical  laws 
which  governed  the  existence  of  all  perceptible  things, 
and  which,  for  him,  represented  their  truest  reality, 
inasmuch  as  they  were  the  eternal  and  intelligible 
counterparts  of  the  things  of  flux.  But  these  laws  of 
matter  depended  for  their  expression  on  geometrical, 
no  less  than  arithmetical,  formulae.  The  science  of 
number,  indeed,  supplied  the  proportions  which  were 
necessary  to  the  formulation  of  the  law;  number  was 
in  a  manner  its  ova  la,  but  the  no  less  essential  v\rj 
1  M.  8.  1084  b  26.  2  Cf.  Ar.  Phys.  V.  6.  206  b  27. 


128  THE   ARISTOTELIAN   CRITIQUE   OF 

took  the  form  of  primary  geometrical  triangles,  in- 
volving, of  course,  the  /neya  kol  fiLtcpbv  of  space.  And 
some  Platonists  seem  to  have  adhered  to  this  view  to 
the  end,  if  we  can  trust  the  evidence  of  M.  9.  1085  a  33, 
where  it  is  stated  that  some  preferred  to  think  of  the 
ideas  as  composed  of  the  arty  fir)  and  a  spatial  vXtj. 

It  is  just  possible,  however,  that  Plato  may  have 
analysed  the  aroix€^a  °f  his  mathematical  ideas  yet 
further,  and  announced  that  the  ultimate  elements  of 
all  were  the  numerical  unit  and  the  numerical  doptaro^ 
Svds;.  At  N.  3.  1090  b  21  the  adherents  of  the  second 
school  of  Platonism  are  represented  as  generating 
mathematical  /neyeOr)  (which  are  the  equivalent  of  the 
mathematical  ideas  of  the  Timaeus)  out  of  apiO^bs  and 
v\rj,  through  their  identification  of  the  point  with  the 
unit,  and  so  on,  and  deriving  number  itself  from  the  ev 
and  the  aopiaros  St/a?  as  apyai.  Moreover,  it  is  quite 
conceivable  that  Plato  would  have  concurred  in  the 
view,  given  at  B.  1002  a  4,  that  the  surface  is  prior  to  the 
solid,  the  line  to  the  surface,  and  the  point  and  monad 
to  the  line.  Seeing,  therefore,  that  Plato  in  all  proba- 
bility did  regard1  the  fundamental  conceptions  of 
geometry  as  varieties  of  the  corresponding  arithmetical 
notions,  by  his  identification  of  the  point  with  unity, 
the  line  with  duality,  and  so  on,  it  may  be  that  he 
finally  decided  that  the  ultimate  bases  of  the  mathe- 
matical ideas  were  the  unit  and  the  arithmetical  }ieya 
kcu  /M/cpov.  Some  such  modification  of  view  is  declared 
by  Aristotle  in  his  Physics  to  have  taken  place.  In  the 
fourth  book  of  the  Physics2  we  are  told  that   Plato's 

1  See  Rep.  528  a,  b.     Cf.  Phys.  T.  6.  206  b  27. 
2  Phys.  A.  2.  209  b  11. 


THE   IDEAS    AND    NUMBERS    OF    PLATO  129 

account  of  vXtj,  or  to  fxeTaX^irTiKov,  in  the  Timaeus 
was  different  from  that  given  in  the  aypafya  Soyfiara : 
Sco  kclI  UXdrcov  rrjv  vXrjv  real  rrjv  ^ojpav  ravro  (f>r]atv 
elvai  ev  ra>  Tifiai(p'  to  yap  /jLeTaXrjTTTitcov  teal  tt)v  yu>pav 
ev  /cat  tclvtoV)  aXXov  Be  rpoirov  eicel  re  Xeycov  to 
/n€raXrj7rTL/cbv  teal  ev  tols  Xeyo/jbevots  aypd(f)OL<;  Boyfiaacv. 
Similar  affirmations  from  other  commentators  on  Plato 
or  Aristotle  are  too  numerous  to  mention.  If  these 
considerations,  then,  are  to  be  accepted  as  proof,  we 
may  say  that  Plato's  own  later  views  are  to  be  assigned, 
if  to  any,  to  the  second  of  the  Platonic  schools  which 
we  have  been  considering. 

We  may  then,  I  think,  regard  it  as  certain  that 
Plato,  in  his  latest  stage,  paid  great  attention  to 
certain  mathematical  ideas,  or  laws,  governing  mate- 
rial existences,  and  as  highly  probable  that  he  proved 
these  mathematical  proportions  to  be  capable  of  being 
analysed  into  two  ultimate  elements,  the  ev  and  the 
indefinite  dyad.  Immediately  after  his  death,  however, 
and  possibly  before,  the  Platonists  seem  to  have  fastened 
on  the  number-theory  as  a  fit  medium  for  all  manner 
of  Pythagorean  extravagances,  which  the  philosophical 
Plato  could  not  have  entertained  for  a  moment.  This 
they  accomplished  partly  by  amalgamating  with  the 
number-doctrine  certain  Pythagorean  traditions,  such 
as  the  attribution  of  special  virtue1  to  the  numbers  ten 
or  seven,  and  the  derivation  of  good  and  evil  from  the 
ultimate  irepa^  and  aireipov  in  number,  and  partly  by 
interpreting  certain  passages  in  Plato's  dialogues  in  too 
literal  a  sense.  It  would  seem,  in  fact,  that  a  regular 
school  for  the  interpretation  of  the  dialogues  started 

1  See  N.  6.  1093  a  28 ;  M.  8.  1084  ■  12  ;  N.  4.  1091  b  34. 
W.  9 


130  THE   ARISTOTELIAN   CRITIQUE   OF 

soon  after  Plato's  death.  Xenocrates'  interpretation  of 
Timaeus  35  A  has  already  been  touched  upon ;  and  the 
wide-spread  view  that  the  Svds  was  the  cause  of  evil, 
and  the  ev  consequently  of  good,  was  in  all  probability 
based  upon  passages  like  Timaeus  53  B,  where  the 
v7ro8oxv>  before  the  introduction  of  method  and 
measure,  is  said  to  have  been  the  reverse  of  fcdWtarov 
and  apiarov.  The  combination  of  the  ideas  of  the 
Republic  with  the  number-theory,  as  illustrated  in  the 
doctrine  of  the  first  school  of  Platonists,  is  also  a  case  in 
point.  Moreover,  the  people1  who  fancifully  attributed 
the  number  one  to  1/0O?,  two  to  eV^o-r^/A??,  three  to  ho%a, 
and  so  on,  were  probably  interpreting  the  Timaeus  in 
a  fashion  of  their  own.  The  principle  that  soul  is 
composed  of  the  same  elements  as  the  things  upon 
which  it  operates,  which  Plato  presumably  enunciated 
in  his  story  of  the  creation  of  ^frv^v  ou^  °f  Same,  Other, 
etc.,  gave  rise  to  the  inference  that  aLorOrjais,  like  the 
aicrOrjTov,  is  represented  by  the  number  4,  whence,  by 
Pythagorean  analogy,  the  numbers  one,  two,  three,  were 
assigned  to  the  other  activities  of  soul. 

Such,  then,  is  the  sum  of  the  information  to  be 
obtained  from  Aristotle's  critique.  In  the  course  of 
our  enquiry  we  have  found  confirmation  for  the  belief 
that  Plato's  ideal  theory  changed  its  character  from 
time  to  time  according  as  his  knowledge,  and  particularly 
his  logical  knowledge,  grew,  that,  although  for  him  the 
assumption  of  eternal  ideas  was  always  obligatory,  he 
latterly  no  longer  retained  them  for  the  explanation  of 
things  whose  mystery  was  easily  solved  by  the  logic  of 
ordinary  intelligence,  and  that  his  account  of  the  idea 
1  De  An.  A.  2.  404  b  20. 


THE  IDEAS  AND  NUMBERS  OF  PLATO     131 

at  the  end  of  his  life  was  materially  different  from  that 
of  the  Phaedo  and  the  Republic.  In  Essays  in  and  iv 
we  had  reason  to  think  that,  at  the  end  of  his  days,  he 
recognised  two  distinct  classes  of  ideal  existences,  the 
first  being  at  once  the  eternal  cause  of  all  Becoming 
and  the  ethical  ideal  of  every  living  soul,  the  second 
being  a  mathematical  law  governing  material  bodies, 
the  direct  criterion  of  physical  beauty.  Of  the  former 
Aristotle  takes  no  account ;  but  from  his  exhaustive 
treatment  of  the  latter  it  would  appear  that  the 
mathematical  ideas,  being  the  more  tangible,  took  the 
fancy  of  the  school,  and  attracted  greater  investigation. 
And  our  conclusion  that  these  mathematical  ideas  were 
restricted  to  natural  objects  only,  to  the  exclusion  of 
qualities,  relations,  (ncevaard  and  such-like,  has  found 
abundant  confirmation  in  Aristotle's  own  words.  It 
has  also  become  clear  that  the  nature  of  the  ideas,  as 
they  were  conceived  successively  in  such  dialogues 
as  the  Sophist,  Philebus,  and  Timaeus,  was  not  in 
the  least  comprehended  by  Aristotle,  since  he  expects 
them  to  be  in  every  respect  identical  with  those  of 
the  Phaedo  and  the  Republic,  and  complains  when  he 
discovers  that  they  are  not.  The  only  phase  of  the 
ideal  theory  on  which  he  can  speak  with  any  confidence 
is  the  very  latest  stage,  the  doctrine  of  numbers,  and 
even  there,  as  we  saw  in  our  examination  of  A.  c.  6,  he 
is  not  careful  to  distinguish  between  Plato's  own  view, 
and  those  which  are  elsewhere  acknowledged  to  be 
subsequent  accretions. 

To  follow  Aristotle  in  detail  through  his  criticisms 
of  Plato  and  the  Platonic  point  of  view  would  be  an 
unprofitable  as  well  as  a  tedious  task,  for  nearly  every 


132  THE   ARISTOTELIAN   CRITIQUE   OF 

objection  is  levelled  from  the  authors  scientific  point  of 
view,  and  with  an  idealist  would  have  no  weight  at  all. 
The  scorn  which  is  heaped  upon  the  ideas  in  general  is 
directed  largely  against  the  metaphorical  processes  of 
fieOegts  and  /jll/ultjo-l?1,  which  Plato  used  in  describing  their 
functions ;  as  Plato  himself  would  have  acknowledged 
these  to  be  mere  /jL€Ta<f>opal  TroirjTt/coi,  the  criticism  is 
hardly  useful.  The  ideas  as  numbers  are  chiefly 
criticised  because  they  imply  the  priority  of  apcO/juS?2* 
which  is  a  <rv/jL/3e/3r)/c6s,  to  the  avvo\opy  which  is  ovala. 
This  taunt  is,  of  course,  dependent  upon  Aristotle's 
classification  of  categories,  in  which  ovaia  precedes 
iroaov — which  is  scarcely  a  fit  criterion  to  use  in 
reviewing  a  predecessor,  whose  whole  point  of  view  was 
opposed  to  such  a  classification.  Another  objection 
consists  in  the  statement  that,  even  if  the  idea  is  a 
number8,  it  must  be  apiOfxh^  tlvcov,  of  some  material 
ingredients — which  in  itself  shows  how  materialistic 
was  Aristotle's  point  of  view,  and  how  utterly  he  had 
failed  to  grasp  the  subtlety  of  Plato's  speculations  in 
the  Timaeus.  There  are  a  few  points,  indeed,  which 
might  justly  be  made  by  any  man  of  science,  but  the 
criticism  on  the  whole  is  so  absurdly  literal  that  it 
scarcely  merits  serious  reading.  The  attack4  on  the 
Sua?  aopiaros,  for  instance,  is  based  largely  on  the 
notion  that  it  is  literally  a  dyad,  which  we  know  to  be 
inaccurate.  In  fact,  Aristotle  is  the  last  authority  to 
look  to  for  a  fair  and  liberal  account  of  Platonism. 

1  A.  9.  991 a  10,  20  ;  M.  5.  1079  b  25. 

2  B.  5.  1001 b  26;  M.  9.  1085*  20. 

3  A.  9.  991  b  20;  N.  5.  1092  b  22. 

4  M.  7.  1081  b  17  ;  8.  1084  b  37. 


THE  IDEAS  AND  NUMBERS  OF  PLATO      133 

Under  these  circumstances  there  was,  of  course, 
little  likelihood  that  Plato's  system,  especially  in  its 
latest  form,  should  be  handed  down  to  us  in  the  form 
in  which  he  himself  evolved  and  formulated  it.  Every- 
thing has  tended  to  obscure  both  the  expression  and 
the  content  of  the  number-theory,  and  one  may  almost 
agree  with  Berkeley,  and  say  that  "  Aristotle  and  his 
followers  have  made  a  monstrous  representation  of  the 
Platonic  ideas,  and  some  of  Plato's  own  school  have 
said  very  odd  things  concerning  them1."  The  aim  of 
this  paper  has  been  to  show  that,  in  spite  of  all  these 
obscurations,  one  can  detect  a  certain  residuum  that 
may  fairly  be  ascribed  to  Plato  himself,  and  that  the 
number-theory  cannot  be  summed  up  placidly  as  an 
elaborate  fiction  concocted  by  Plato's  successors  for  the 
mere  purpose  of  deceiving  posterity. 

1  Berkeley,  Reflexions  and  Inquiries,  §  338.    (Bohn's  edition  vol.  iii. 
p.  325.) 


CAMBRIDGE:    PRINTED   BY  JOHN   CLAY,   M.A.    AT  THE   UNIVERSITY   PRESS. 


r-  u 


i  -  i- 


n 


00 
CO 

00 


o     * 

cc  s 

|H     CD 


CO 


University  of  Toronto 
Library 


DO  NOT 

REMOVE 

THE 

CARD 

FROM 

THIS 

POCKET 


Acme  Library  Card  Pocket 
LOWE-MARTIN  CO.  limited 


w 


mkm 


Hfe 


&£i^»lH 


i^BBHIHb 

111  1  ■  ■'■••.■»■>••■ '■"''■■•■•■•  ■■"■•  :li 


■■•'■■;;,":;   '     .'i':-.'v. 
1111111 


mutism 


n 


-••":•■■■    ■■■^-    •'■        -       j 

'■•.-•:-•■"...■.';■■■•■.       3 


/'••-.■■:■;.-